Leisure Time Telescope LX20 User Manual

Instruction Manual  
7" LX200 Maksutov-Cassegrain Telescope  
8", 10", and 12" LX200 Schmidt-Cassegrain Telescopes  
Meade Instruments Corporation  
World's leading manufacturer of astronomical telescopes for the serious amateur.  
6001 OAK CANYON, IRVINE, CALIFORNIA 92618-5200 U.S.A. • (949) 451-1450  
FAX: (949) 451-1460 • www.meade.com  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTE: Instructions for the use of optional accessories  
are not included in this manual. For details in this regard,  
see the Meade General Catalog.  
In the Schmidt-Cassegrain design of the Meade 8", 10", and 12" models, light enters from the right, passes through a thin lens with 2-sided  
aspheric correction ("correcting plate"), proceeds to a spherical primary mirror, and then to a convex aspheric secondary mirror. The  
convex secondary mirror multiplies the effective focal length of the primary mirror and results in a focus at the focal plane, with light passing  
through a central perforation in the primary mirror.  
The 8", 10", and 12" models include oversize 8.25", 10.375" and 12.375" primary mirrors, respectively, yielding fully illuminated fields-of-  
view significantly wider than is possible with standard-size primary mirrors. Note that light ray (2) in the figure would be lost entirely, except  
for the oversize primary. It is this phenomenon which results in Meade 8", 10", and 12" Schmidt-Cassegrains having off-axis field  
illuminations 10% greater, aperture-for-aperture, than other Schmidt-Cassegrains utilizing standard-size primary mirrors. The optical  
design of the 4" Model 2045D is almost identical but does not include an oversize primary, since the effect in this case is small.  
LX200 Schmidt-Cassegrain telescopes now feature new baffle tube designs. These computer-optimized designs incorporate a series of 7  
to 11 (depending on the focal ratio and size of the LX200) internal field-stops to eliminate almost all internal reflections, yielding the best  
image contrast available in any Schmidt-Cassegrain available today.  
The Meade 7" Maksutov-Cassegrain Optical System (Diagram not to scale)  
The Meade 7" Maksutov-Cassegrain design optimizes imaging performance by utilizing a combination of two-sided spherical meniscus  
lens (right), a strongly aspheric f/2.5 primary mirror, and a spherical secondary mirror. The convex secondary mirror multiplies the  
effective focal length of the primary by a factor of six, resulting in an overall f/15 system at the Cassegrain focus.  
The oversize 8.25" primary mirror results in a fully-illuminated (unvignetted) field of view significantly wider than can be obtained with  
Maksutov optics incorporating primary mirrors of the same aperture as their meniscus correcting lenses. Computer-optimized primary and  
secondary mirror baffles, as well as a sequence of field stops internal to the primary mirror baffle, yield lunar, planetary, stellar, and deep-  
space images of uncommonly high contrast and resolution.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
¬ WARNING! ¬  
Never use the LX200 telescope to look at the Sun! Looking at or near the Sun will cause instant and  
irreversible damage to your eye. Eye damage is often painless, so there is no warning to the observer  
that damage has occurred until it is too late. Do not point the telescope or its viewfinder at or near  
the Sun. Do not look through the telescope or its viewfinder as it is moving. Children should always  
have adult supervision while observing.  
Captions for Figure 1  
1. Viewfinder Dew Shield  
10. Right Ascension Setting Circle  
11. Power Panel  
2. Viewfinder Collimation Screws  
3. Declination (Dec) Setting Circle  
4. Declination Pointer  
12. Keypad Hand Controller  
13. Diagonal Mirror  
5. Focus Knob  
14. Eyepiece  
6. Eyepiece Holder  
15. Bubble Level  
7. Right Ascension (R.A) Lock  
8. Right Ascension Slow-Motion Controls  
9. Right Ascension Vernier Pointer  
16. Hour Angel (HA) Pointer  
17. Drive Base  
.
18. Viewfinder Focus Lock Ring  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
INTRODUCTION  
one of 351 alignment stars or any one of 56,050 SAO, UGC, IC or  
GCVS objects, press GO TO, and the telescope automatically  
slews, or moves, to the object at up to 8° per sec., centering it in  
the main telescope field.  
As a new LX200 owner, you are preparing for a journey into the  
universe with the most advanced amateur telescope ever  
produced. The advent of this instrument is the culmination of  
twenty years of innovation and design at Meade Instruments;  
never before have the features you have in your hands been  
available to amateur astronomers: from robotic object location to  
the revolutionary Smart Drive and the most stable mounting  
structure ever. Your telescope comes to you ready for adventure;  
it will be your tour guide and traveling companion in a universe of  
planets, galaxies, and stars.  
c. Altazimuth Mode Operation  
For all visual observing applications, and for lunar and planetary  
photography, Meade LX200's may be set up in the Altazimuth  
mode. Just attach the telescope's drive base directly to the tripod,  
use the fast 1-star alignment procedure, and the telescope's  
computer actuates 2-axis tracking that keeps objects precisely  
centered in the field, even at high powers, during the entire  
observing session.  
Meade 8", 10", and 12" LX200 Schmidt-Cassegrain and 7"  
Maksutov-Cassegrain telescopes are instruments of advanced  
mirror-lens design for astronomical and terrestrial applications.  
Optically and mechanically, the 7", 8", 10", and 12" telescope  
models are perhaps the most sophisticated and precisely  
manufactured telescopes ever made available to the serious  
amateur. These telescopes enable the visual astronomer to reach  
out for detailed observations of the Solar System (the planets:  
Jupiter, Saturn, Mars) and beyond to distant nebulae, star  
clusters, and galaxies. The astrophotographer will find a virtually  
limitless range of possibilities since, with the precision Meade  
worm-gear motor drive system, long exposure guided  
photography becomes not a distant goal, but an achievable  
reality. The capabilities of the instrument are essentially limited  
not by the telescope, but by the acquired skills of the observer  
and photographer.  
d. Terrestrial Operation  
Meade LX200's make incredible land-view telescopes. Set the  
telescope up in the Altazimuth format, activate the Land menu  
option on the telescope's computer, and use the keypad to track  
land objects on both axes at any of the same 4 drive speeds!  
e. Keypad and Power Panel Functions  
The multifunction capability of LX200's includes direct  
connection of popular CCD autoguider/imagers; RS- 232 serial  
interface with a personal computer (PC), allowing the user to  
perform all of the keypad functions through, or write custom  
telescope software for  
a
PC; brightness level control of an  
illuminated reticle eyepiece from the keypad and including special  
pulse-mode reticle operation.  
The 7", 8", 10", and 12" LX200 are, with the exception of a few  
2. Standard Equipment  
assembly  
operations  
and  
features,  
almost  
identical  
a. 7" Model LX200  
operationally. Most standard and optional accessories are  
interchangeable between the three telescopes. The instructions  
in this manual generally apply to all three telescopes; when  
exceptions to this rule occur, they are clearly pointed out.  
Includes 7" Maksutov-Cassegrain optical tube assembly with EMC  
super multi-coatings (D = 178mm, F = 2670mm-f/15); heavy-  
duty fork mount, with 4"-dia. sealed polar ball bearing, quartz-  
microprocessor-controlled 5.75" worm gears on both axes;  
setting circles in RA and Dec: handheld keypad Electronic  
Command Center with digital readout display, permanently-  
programmable Smart Drive, 9-speed drive control on both axes,  
GO TO controller, High-Precision Pointing, and 64,340-object  
onboard celestial software library; internal tube-cooling fan for  
rapid image stabilization; 25 ft. power cord and adapter for  
Important Note: If you are anxious to use your Meade LX200  
Telescope for the first time, at the very least be sure to read  
TELESCOPE ASSEMBLY (page 7), and QUICK START (page 9)  
sections of this manual. Thereafter, we urge you to read the  
balance of this manual thoroughly at your leisure, in order that  
you may fully enjoy the many features offered by the  
instrument.  
telescope operation from 115v.AC;  
8
x
50mm viewfinder;  
eyepiece-holder and diagonal prism (1.25"); Series 4000  
SP26mm eyepiece; variable-height field tripod; operating  
instructions.  
1. What Is the LX200? An Overview  
Meade LX200 SCT's mark a new era in telescope technology for  
the amateur astronomer, whether beginner or seasoned veteran.  
For the beginner LX200 electronics permit the location and  
observation of the major planets as well as hundreds of deep-sky  
objects the very first night you use the telescope. For the  
experienced amateur the telescopes' pushbutton electric slewing,  
digital readouts, Smart Drive, and much more open up visual and  
photographic capabilities heretofore undreamed of.  
b. 8" Model LX200  
Includes 8" Schmidt-Cassegrain optical tube assembly with EMC  
super multi-coatings (D = 203mm, F = 1280mm-f/6.3 or 2000mm-  
f/10); heavy-duty fork mount, with 4"-dia. sealed polar ball  
bearing, quartz-microprocessor-controlled 5.75" worm gears on  
both axes, and multi-function power panel display on the drive  
base; manual and electric slow-motion controls on both axes;  
setting circles in RA and Dec; handheld keypad Electronic  
Command Center with digital readout display, PPEC Smart Drive,  
9-speed drive control on both axes, GO TO controller, High-  
Precision Pointing, and 64,340-object onboard celestial software  
library; 25 ft. power cord and adapter for telescope operation from  
115V.AC; 8 x 50mm viewfinder: eyepiece-holder and diagonal  
prism (1.25"); Series 4000 SP26mm eyepiece; variable-height  
field tripod; operating instructions.  
a. Heavy-Duty Mounts  
with 9-speed Dual-Axis Electronics  
DC-servo-motor-controlled worm gear drives on both telescope  
axes permit observatory-level precision in tracking, guiding, and  
slewing. The 9-speed dual-axis drives cover every possible  
contingency of telescope positioning: Press the SLEW button on  
the keypad controller for rapid motion of the telescope across the  
skies at up to 8 degrees per sec. (6 degrees per sec. for the 12"  
LX200) on both axes simultaneously; once near the target, switch  
instantly to the FIND speed for centering in the viewfinder at 2  
degrees per sec. Observing the object in the main telescope, use  
the CNTR speed (32x sidereal) to place the object in the center of  
the field. During long-exposure astrophotography press the  
GUIDE button for precise corrections at 2x sidereal speed.  
c. 10" Model LX200  
Includes 10" Schmidt-Cassegrain optical tube assembly with EMC  
super multi-coatings (D  
=
254mm,  
F
=
1600mm-f/6.3 or  
2500mm-f/10); heavy-duty fork mount, with 4"-dia. sealed polar  
ball bearing, quartz-microprocessor-controlled 5.75" worm  
gears on both axes, and multi-function power panel display on the  
drive base; manual and electric slow-motion controls on both axes;  
setting circles in RA and Dec; handheld keypad Electronic  
Command Center with digital readout display, PPEC Smart Drive,  
9-speed drive control on both axes, GO TO controller, High-  
Precision Pointing, and 64,340-object onboard  
b. Built-in 64,359-Object Library  
Enter into the keypad any of the 110 Messier objects, 7,840 of the  
finest NGC objects (galaxies, diffuse or planetary nebulae, star  
clusters), one of the 8 major planets from Mercury to Pluto,  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
celestial software library; 25 ft. power cord and adapter for  
telescope operation from 115v.AC; 50mm viewfinder;  
eyepiece-holder and diagonal prism (1.25"); Series 4000  
SP26mm eyepiece; variable-height field tripod; operating  
instructions.  
As the high intensity light passes through the Schmidt corrector  
plate, most of it is transmitted through (about 98%+) while the rest  
of the light scatters through the glass. As the light hits the mirrored  
surfaces, most of it is reflected back (about 94%) while the rest of  
it scatters across the coatings. The total amount of scattered light  
will be significant, and its effects allow you to see microscopic  
details that are normally invisible to the unaided eye. These  
anomalous details are real, but their combined effects will in no  
way impose limits on the optical performance, even under the  
most demanding observing or imaging criteria.  
8
x
d. 12" Model LX200  
Includes 12" Schmidt-Cassegrain optical tube assembly with EMC  
super multi-coatings (D = 305mm, F = 3048mm-f/10); heavy-duty  
fork mount, with 4"-dia. sealed polar ball bearing, quartz-  
microprocessor-controlled 5.75" worm gears on both axes, and  
multi-function power panel display on the drive base; manual and  
electric slow-motion controls on both axes; setting circles in RA  
and Dec; handheld keypad Electronic Command Center with  
digital readout display, PPEC Smart Drive, 7-speed drive control  
on both axes, GO TO controller, High-Precision Pointing, and  
64,340-object onboard celestial software library; 25 ft. power cord  
and adapter for telescope operation from 115V.AC; 8 x 50mm  
viewfinder; 2" diagonal mirror with 1.25" adapter; Series 4000  
SP26mm eyepiece; giant field tripod; foam-fitted carrying case;  
operating instructions.  
4. Caution: All LX200 Owners  
CAUTION: Serious damage to the drive gears may  
result from shock in handling, while transporting or  
commercially shipping the LX200, should the R.A. lock  
(7, Fig. 1), and/or the Dec. lock (2, Fig. 4) be left  
engaged. Always release the locks when storing in the  
case, or when crating for commercial shipment to allow  
the telescope to give, if the case or crate is sharply  
jarred or dropped.  
Also, the optical and mechanical axes of all LX200  
telescopes have been carefully aligned at the factory to  
ensure accurate object pointing. Do not loosen or  
remove the fork arms or optical tube assembly from  
the drive base; the resulting misalignment of the axes  
UNPACKING AND INSPECTION  
As you begin to unpack your telescope from its cartons, you will  
probably be interested in setting it up right away; we certainly  
understand your excitement but please take a few minutes to read  
this page before doing so. You should verify that you have all the  
proper equipment, and that it has arrived to you undamaged.  
will result in inaccurate slewing of the telescope in the  
GO TO mode.  
We strongly recommend that you keep your original packing  
materials. If it should ever become necessary for you to return  
your telescope to the Meade factory for servicing, these will help  
ensure that no shipping damage will occur.  
5. Caution: 10" and 12" LX200 Owners  
CAUTION: Do not attempt to turn the focuser knob of the  
optical tube until you have read this note!  
Meade LX200 telescopes supplied to countries outside the U.S.A.  
are identical to those offered domestically, with the exception of  
the AC wall adapter.  
NOTE: Next to the base of the focuser you will see a red-  
colored slotted head bolt. This bolt is used only for safety in  
shipment. Remove this bolt before attempting to turn the  
focuser knob. In its place, insert the rubber plug provided as a  
dust protector (this rubber plug is included with your hardware  
package).  
1. What You Should Have  
Carefully unpack and remove all the telescope parts from their  
packing material. Compare each part to the Standard  
Equipment. You may wish to place a check next to each item as  
you identify it. These Packing Programs represent the original  
specifications for this instrument. Each telescope has been  
inspected twice at the factory to confirm the inclusion of every  
item.  
Your focuser is now operational.  
2. Please Look Everything Over  
Meade Instruments and your shipper have taken precautions to  
ensure that no shipping damage will occur, but if your shipment  
has suffered severe vibration or impact damage (whether or not  
the shipping cartons show damage) then it is important that you  
retain all the original packing and contact the shipper to arrange a  
formal inspection of the package or packages. This procedure is  
required prior to any warranty servicing by Meade Instruments.  
a. Commercial Reshipment  
To commercially re-ship the telescope, be sure to follow this  
procedure:  
1.  
2.  
Turn the focuser knob clockwise until it stops. This will bring  
the primary mirror all the way back in the tube.  
3. Inspecting the Optics  
Remove the rubber plug and insert the red-headed bolt.  
Thread it in to a firm snug feel. Do not overtighten. (If you  
Note on the "Flashlight" Test: If a flashlight or other high-  
intensity light source is pointed down the main telescope tube, you  
may at first be shocked at the appearance of the optics. To the  
uninitiated, the view (depending on your line of sight and the angle  
the light is coming from) may reveal what would appear to be  
scratches, dark or bright spots, or just generally uneven coatings,  
giving the appearance of poor surface quality. These effects are  
only seen when a high intensity light is transmitted through lenses  
or reflected off the mirrors, and can be seen on any high quality  
optical system, including the giant research telescopes in use  
today. It should be pointed out, however, that optical quality cannot  
be judged by this grossly misleading "test", but through careful  
star testing. The Flashlight Test causes even the very best optics  
to look "terrible".  
have misplaced the red-headed bolt, you may use any other  
bolt that is 1/4-20x1" long.  
3. When packaging the 10" or 12" LX200, be sure to release the  
R.A. lock (7, Fig. 1), and Dec. lock (2, Fig. 4), to prevent  
shock to the gears in the motor assemblies should the  
package suffer severe handling.  
Please note that commercial shipment of the 10" and 12" LX200  
Telescope without the safety bolt in place and packed in the  
original factory supplied shipping containers as described above is  
done at the owner's risk and your warranty may be voided if  
shipping damage results.  
6. Keypad Version Number  
The current keypad version is 3.20 (see sticker on back of  
keypad). This does not indicate the telescope software version—  
which is displayed on the keypad LED at power-up.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
TELESCOPE ASSEMBLY  
Use the following steps to assemble your telescope.  
Alternately, the field tripod can be used in conjunction with the  
appropriate optional equatorial wedge (APPENDIX A, page 25) for  
long exposure astrophotography. The equatorial wedge permits  
alignment of the telescope's Polar Axis with the Celestial Pole (or  
North Star).  
NOTE: If the section is not applicable to all LX200 models, it is  
noted at the beginning of each section.  
1. The Field Tripod  
The field tripods (Figs. 2 and 3) for Meade 8", 10", and 12" LX200  
telescopes are supplied as completely assembled units, except for  
the spreader bar (4, Fig. 2) and the 6 lock knobs (2 knobs for each  
of the 3 tripod legs) used to adjust the height of the tripod. These  
knobs are packed separately for safety in shipment.  
After removing the field tripod from its shipping carton, stand the  
tripod vertically, with the tripod feet down and with the tripod still  
fully collapsed (see Fig. 3). Grasp two of the tripod legs and, with  
the full weight of the tripod on the third leg, gently pull the legs  
apart to a fully open position.  
For visual (i.e., non-photographic) observations, the drive base  
(17, Fig. 1) of the telescope's fork mount is attached directly to  
the field tripod. The telescope in this way is mounted in an  
"Altazimuth" ("Altitude-Azimuth," or "vertical-horizontal") format.  
The telescope in this configuration moves along vertical and  
horizontal axes, corresponding respectively to the Declination and  
Right Ascension axes (explained later in this manual) in an  
astronomical observing mode.  
Thread in the 6 lock-knobs (2 on each tripod leg) near the foot of  
each tripod leg (Fig. 2). These lock-knobs are used to fix the  
height of the inner, extendible tripod leg sections.  
NOTE: "Firm feel" tightening is sufficient; over-tightening may  
result in stripping of the knob threads or damage to the tripod  
legs and results in no additional strength.  
The spreader bar (4, Fig. 2) has been removed for shipment. To  
replace, first remove the threaded rod (2, Fig.2) from the tripod  
head (1, Fig. 2); a small piece of plastic holds the threaded rod in  
place. Remove the small plastic bag that is stapled to the threaded  
rod. This bag contains the "C" clip retainer (used below) and an  
extra clip.  
Slide the spreader bar onto the threaded rod (note the correct  
orientation as shown in Fig. 2) and position the threaded rod back  
through the tripod head. Place the clip retainer ( a "C" clip) into the  
slot in the threaded rod. This clip holds the threaded rod in place.  
See Fig. 3.  
Position the spreader bar so that the 3 arms of the spreader bar  
are lined up with the 3 tripod legs.  
Place the entire telescope onto the top of the tripod head, and  
thread the threaded rod into the central threaded hole in the  
bottom of the drive base of the telescope. Tighten the tension knob  
(3, Fig. 2); firm tightening of the tension knob is sufficient to result  
in rigid positioning of the tripod legs.  
To vary the tripod height, loosen the 6 lock-knobs, slide the 3  
inner tripod leg sections out to the desired height, and firmly re-  
tighten (but do not overtighten) the 6 lock-knobs.  
To collapse the tripod (after removing the telescope and equatorial  
wedge, if applicable) for storage follow these steps:  
Rotate the spreader bar 60° from its assembled position, so  
that one spreader bar arm is located between each adjacent  
pair of tripod legs.  
At the base of the tripod is a 3-vane extension strut system,  
with a circular hub at its center (7, Fig. 2). Grasp the tripod  
head (1, Fig. 2) with one hand and, with the other hand, pull  
directly "up" on the central hub of the extension strut system.  
This operation will cause the tripod legs to move inward to a  
collapsed position.  
PRECAUTIONARY NOTES  
If the tripod does not seem to extend or collapse  
easily, do not force the tripod legs in or out. By  
following the instructions above, the tripod will  
function properly, but if you are unclear on the  
proper procedure, forcing the tripod into an  
incorrect position may damage the extension  
strut system.  
Do not overtighten the 6 lock-knobs used to fix  
the inner tripod leg sections at various heights.  
"Firm feel" tightening is sufficient.  
Be sure the spreader bar (4, Fig. 2) is not  
upside-down on the threaded rod.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
4. Checking the Collimation of the Optics  
2. Mounting the Viewfinder  
The optical systems of all Meade Schmidt-Cassegrains are  
precisely collimated, or aligned, before leaving the factory.  
However, if the telescope has received a severe jolt in shipment  
the optics can become de-collimated, a situation which may result  
in serious image degradation. Recollimating the optics is,  
however, a simple procedure which is easily performed by the  
telescope user. We urge all LX200 owners to confirm the  
Collimation of their telescope, and to recollimate the optics if  
necessary. For details in this regard, see page 82.  
Each 7", 8", 10", and 12" LX200 telescope is supplied as standard  
equipment with an 8x50mm straight-through viewfinder. The  
bracket for this viewfinder is packed separately from the finder  
itself, and 6 black nylon thumbscrews for Collimation are pre-  
threaded into the viewfinder bracket. The viewfinder bracket  
mounts onto the telescope with a quick-release mount. See Fig. 1.  
a. Attaching the Viewfinder  
The viewfinder is shipped separately from the bracket and must be  
installed into the bracket. Slide the viewfinder into the bracket and  
lightly tighten the 6 Collimation (alignment) screws (2, Fig. 1).  
NOTE: There is no Collimation procedure required for the  
Meade 7" Maksutov-Cassegrain telescope. Factory alignment  
assures optimal viewing accuracies.  
The quick-release mount allows the viewfinder to be easily  
attached or removed from the telescope. To attach the unit, simply  
slide the viewfinder with bracket into the mating base on the  
telescope and tighten the two thumbscrews.  
5. 12" Tube Swing-Through Limit  
The length of the 12" LX200 optical tube prohibits the correcting  
plate end of the tube from swinging through the fork arms — the  
tube will hit the mount. When the telescope is aligned, the  
software will stop the telescope from moving into the mount. If the  
telescope is not aligned, there are also mechanical stops.  
b. Focusing the Viewfinder  
The viewfinder has been pre-focused at the factory. However,  
should it become necessary to adjust the focus, follow these  
steps:  
1. Loosen the focus lock ring (18, Fig. 1).  
When in LAND or ALTAZ modes, this limit does not restrict any  
sections of the sky, since the limit is set at 45° from straight down.  
When in the POLAR mode, some parts of the sky might be  
restricted, depending on the latitude of the observing site.  
2.  
While looking at a star, rotate the Dew Shield (1, Fig. 1) until  
the star is in focus. (This refocuses the objective lens.)  
CAUTION: Take care when rotating counter clockwise.  
You are unthreading the dew shield and it may fall off if  
rotated too far. Refocusing the objective lens will only  
require a few turns of the Dew Shield at most.  
Observing sites with latitudes higher than 45° will not have any  
restrictions. Latitudes below 45° will have the southern horizon  
restricted somewhat. To determine the amount of sky not  
available, subtract the latitude of the observing site from 45. This  
will give the number of degrees of southern horizon that the 12"  
LX200 will not move to. For example, if the latitude of the  
observing site is 35°, then 10° (45-35) of southern sky is  
unavailable for observations.  
3. When the Dew Shield is rotated to the sharpest focus for your  
eye, tighten the focus lock ring against the Dew Shield to fix  
its position.  
c. Collimating the Viewfinder  
The viewfinder will require alignment, or Collimation, with the main  
telescope. Using the 26mm eyepiece, point the main telescope at  
some easy to find land object (e.g., the top of a telephone pole or  
corner of a building) at least 200 yards distant. Center a well-  
defined object in the main telescope. Then, simply turn the 6  
nylon Collimation thumbscrews (2, Fig. 1) until the crosshairs of  
the viewfinder are precisely centered on the object already  
centered in the main telescope. With this Collimation  
accomplished, objects located first in the wide-field viewfinder will  
then be centered in the main telescope's field of view.  
6. 7" Tube Swing-Through Limit  
The length of the 7" LX200 optical tube prohibits the correcting  
plate end of the tube from swinging through the fork arms — the  
tube will hit the mount. When the telescope is aligned, the  
software will stop the telescope from moving into the mount. If the  
telescope is not aligned, there are also mechanical stops and  
some parts of the sky might be restricted if using a wedge,  
depending on the latitude of the observing site.  
Observing sites with latitudes higher than 45° will not have any  
restrictions. Latitudes below 45° will have the southern horizon  
somewhat restricted when using a wedge and polar aligning. To  
determine the amount of sky not available, subtract the latitude of  
the observing site from 45, this will give the number of degrees of  
the southern horizon that the 7" LX50 will not reach. For example,  
if the latitude of the observing site is 35°, then 10° (45 - 35) of  
southern sky is unavailable for observations. No restrictions of  
observable sky occur in the altaz mode of alignment and  
operation.  
3. Attaching the Diagonal Mirror and Eyepiece  
The eyepiece holder (6, Fig. 1) threads directly onto the rear-cell  
thread of the 8" and 10" telescopes. The diagonal prism (13, Fig.  
1) slides into the eyepiece holder of the 7", 8" and 10" telescopes,  
while the 2" diagonal mirror threads directly into the rear-cell  
thread of the 12" telescope. In turn, both the diagonal prism and  
diagonal mirror accept the supplied 1-1/4" O.D. eyepiece.  
For astronomical observations, the diagonal prism or mirror  
generally provides  
a
more comfortable right-angle viewing  
7. Maksutov Fan  
The Maksutov optics are equipped with a fan which will assist  
in the stabilization of the temperature of these optics. The fan  
position. Alternately, in the 8" and 10" telescopes, an eyepiece  
may be inserted directly into the eyepiece holder for straight-  
through observations, the 12" telescope requires the accessory  
eyepiece holder. Note in this case, however, that the image will  
appear inverted and reversed left-for-right. With the diagonal prism  
and mirror, telescopic images appear correctly oriented up-and-  
down, but still reversed left-for-right. For terrestrial applications,  
where a fully corrected image orientation is desired, both up-and-  
down and left-for-right, the optional #924 Erecting Prism* or #928  
45° Erect-Image Diagonal Prism should be ordered separately.  
Eyepieces and the diagonal prism are held in their respective  
will operate when  
a
special power cord (supplied in the  
accessory box) is plugged into the fan and the LX50 panel plug  
marked "Aux" with the power switch in the "ON" position. The  
amount of time required to stabilize the temperature will be  
dependent upon ambient conditions including the observation  
site and preexisting condition of the telescope. The fan should  
be activated at the beginning of the observation session to  
accelerate the temperature stabilization. As soon as the optics  
have reached an equilibrium with the environment the fan  
should be turned off by unplugging the fan power cord. Fan  
operation time should range between 5 and 25 minutes. While  
places on the telescope by  
thumbscrews on the diagonal prism and eyepiece holder.  
a
moderate tightening of the  
it is permissible to run the fan continuously it is not  
recommended because the very slight vibration of the fan may  
cause noticeable movement of the objects observed in the  
sensitive optics.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
QUICK START  
To use the Declination fine-adjust, or manual slow-motion knob,  
lock the telescope in Declination using the Declination lock knob  
(2, Fig. 4), and turn the Declination slow-motion knob (1,Fig.4).  
To utilize all the features of the telescope, it is necessary to enter  
some information into the telescope's computer memory, and  
learn the menu structure of the keypad hand controller, which is  
described in the rest of this manual. As advanced as LX200  
electronics are, the telescope is very straightforward to operate —  
even if you have no experience whatsoever in using a personal  
computer.  
With the above mechanical operations in mind, select an easy to  
find terrestrial object as your first telescope subject  
example, a house or building perhaps one-half mile distant.  
for  
Unlock the Declination lock knob (2, Fig. 4), and R.A. lock (7, Fig.  
1), center the object in the telescopic field of view and then re-lock  
the Dec. and R.A. locks. Precise image centering is accomplished  
by using the Dec. and R.A. slow-motion controls.  
If you are reading this manual for the first time and are anxious to  
"look through the telescope", this section will describe how to use  
the telescope without going through the rest of the manual. But be  
sure to come back and read the details, for most of the telescope's  
features can not be accessed without a full knowledge of these  
details.  
The focus knob (5, Fig. 1) is located at the "4 o'clock" position as  
you face the rear cell of the telescope. Focusing is accomplished  
internally by a precise motion of the telescope primary mirror so  
that, as you turn the focus knob, there are no externally moving  
parts. You will find that if you turn the focus knob counter-clockwise  
you are focusing towards the infinity setting, and turning clockwise  
is for close distance. There are about 45 complete turns to go  
from one end of focus to the other, and it is possible to focus past  
infinity. Be patient during focusing as images quickly go in and out  
of focus with only a slight amount of turning of the focus knob.  
1. Using the LX200 Manually  
The easiest way to use the telescope is to simply operate it  
manually. With the telescope mounted on the field tripod (see The  
Field Tripod, page 7), and with the diagonal prism and eyepiece in  
place, you are ready to make observations through the telescope.  
Even without the viewfinder (if not yet installed), terrestrial objects  
will be fairly easy to locate and center in the telescope's field of  
view with a low power eyepiece, simply by "gun sighting" along  
the side of the main telescope tube.  
2. Using the LX200 In LAND  
The 7", 8", 10", and 12" LX200 telescopes are shipped with the  
microprocessor set to LAND, the align menu option you will wish  
to use to view terrestrial objects. In this menu option 4 different  
motion speeds are active, allowing the telescope to be moved  
electronically by means of the keypad. To use the telescope in  
Land, follow these steps.  
By unlocking the R.A. lock (7, Fig. 1), the telescope may be  
turned rapidly through wide angles in Right Ascension (R.A.). The  
reason for the terminology Right Ascension and its  
complementary term, Declination will be made clear later in this  
manual. For now, Right Ascension simply means "horizontal" and  
Declination means "vertical". Fine adjustments in R.A. are made  
by turning the R.A. slow-motion control knob (8, Fig. 1), while the  
R.A. lock is in the "unlocked" position.  
a. Loosen the Dec. lock knob (2, Fig. 4) and position the optical  
tube approximately level, so that the Dec. setting circle (3,  
Fig. 1) reads 0°. Retighten the Dec. lock knob.  
CAUTION: Do not attempt to move the telescope  
manually in a horizontal direction when the R.A. lock is  
in the "locked" position.  
b.  
Loosen the R.A. lock (7, Fig. 1) and rotate the telescope so  
that the R.A. pointer (9, Fig. 1) and the HA pointer (16, Fig.  
1) are approximately in line with each other. This will position  
the fork arms so that they are parallel to the power panel (11,  
Fig. 1). Tighten the R.A. lock  
The R.A. slow-motion control knob may be turned, if desired, with  
the R.A. lock in a "partially locked" position. In this way, a  
comfortable "drag" in R.A. is created. But do not attempt to  
operate the R.A. slow-motion control knob with the telescope fully  
locked in R.A., as such operation may result in damage to the  
internal gear system.  
The above two steps are not necessary for the telescope to work,  
so don't worry about having to get it exactly right. The telescope  
has some "illegal" positions, places where the telescope will not  
go and these two steps insure proper operation.  
c.  
After setting up the telescope, plug in both coil cords with the  
keypad, one of the supplied power sources, either the AC  
Wall Adapter Power Converter (for AC current wall outlets),  
or the optional DC Cigarette Lighter Power Cord (used in an  
automobiles cigarette lighter outlet, with the ignition turned  
on only to allow the electric power on from the car battery).  
Releasing the Declination lock knob (2, Fig. 4), permits sweeping  
the telescope rapidly through wide angles in Declination.  
d. Turn on the power switch on the power panel of the LX200.  
The keypad display (1, Fig. 5) will show "MEADE" for  
several seconds as the microprocessor does  
a
self-  
diagnostic test. When the self-diagnostic test is complete,  
the display will show "TELESCOPE" on the top line,  
"OBJECT LIBRARY" on the lower line, and the red LED light  
next to the "SLEW" button will light up.  
e.  
At this point, the LX200 is ready to use. Select the speed at  
which you want to move the telescope by pressing the  
appropriate Speed Selection Key (4, Fig 5). Note that you will  
be able to "see" the telescope move only in the SLEW and  
FIND modes; CNTR (center) and GUIDE motions can only be  
seen while looking through the telescope. The red LED next  
to that key (3, Fig. 5) will light, indicating the speed selected.  
Then press one of the four direction keys (2, Fig. 5) to move  
the telescope in that direction at the selected speed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
Method to Use?, page 13). Follow steps 4 through 8 in Setting Up  
the Telescope, page 11, to change the telescope's operation to  
Altazimuth (ALTAZ) mode before proceeding.  
You should find the position of your observing site to within 1 or  
2
minutes of arc in both latitude and longitude. Many automobile,  
pilot, and topographical maps, as well as most atlases show  
latitude and longitude in 15 minute increments or better. The  
accuracy of the LX200 will depend on how close you get, so take a  
little time to get as accurate as you can.  
Once the above information is determined, it can be entered into  
the telescope. It is easiest to enter the data with the telescope  
sitting on a table indoors—do not try to do it outside at night.  
Each step below is given without any details or explanations to  
keep the process as simple and fast as possible. Next to each step  
will also be a sample of what the keypad hand controller display (1,  
Fig. 6) should look like after each step.  
As an example, we will enter the data for Irvine, CA (LAT = 33°35',  
LONG = 117°42'). If at any time you get "lost," simply turn off the  
telescope and restart this procedure.  
1.  
Turn the telescope power on. After a few seconds (after the  
self-diagnostic test is complete), the display will look like  
Display 1.  
2. Press the ENTER key. This selects the TELESCOPE  
functions. The display should now look like Display 2.  
The LX200 can also be moved manually with the R.A. and Dec.  
locks released, or as described above only. The Declination  
manual slow-motion knob (1, Fig.4) is non-functional when power  
is supplied to the telescope. When the power is "on", only use the  
3. Press the ENTER key. This selects the SITE functions. The  
display should look like Display 3.  
N, S, E, and  
W
keys on the keypad hand controller. Serious  
damage can occur to the internal gears of the motor assembly if  
the Declination manual slow-motion knob is turned even a slight  
amount by hand.  
4.  
Press and Hold the ENTER key until the keypad hand  
controller beeps. This selects the first site for editing. The  
display should look like Display 4, with the first "A" flashing.  
3. Using the LX200 In ALTAZ (Altazimuth )  
The two quick start methods described above allow you to use the  
telescope, but do not make use of any of the computer features  
available, including finding objects from the Object Library and  
automatic tracking of stars. In order for these features to work, the  
telescope's power needs to be "on," and the computer needs  
some basic information, which is entered through the keypad.  
Once entered, the information is permanently remembered by  
the telescope's computer and need never be entered again, even if  
the telescope is turned "on" and "off" many times.  
5.  
6.  
Press the ENTER key. The display should now look like  
Display 5.  
This section will explain what keys to push to get the minimum data  
required into the computer, without any detailed explanation (see  
MODE FUNCTIONS, page 16, for detailed instructions). The steps  
detailed here only take a few minutes and allow you to begin  
making use of all the LX200 features.  
Use the number keys to enter your latitude. The underline  
designates the current cursor position. Mistakes can be  
corrected by moving back (using the "E" and "W" keys). A  
negative latitude can be entered by positioning the cursor  
under the "+" and hitting the "NEXT" key (lower right-hand  
key). When the latitude is correct, press ENTER. The display  
will look like Display 6.  
a. Entering Basic Information  
In order for the LX200 to make the conversions between the stellar  
coordinate system (R.A. and Declination) and the Altazimuth  
coordinate system (altitude and azimuth), it needs to know three  
pieces of information. This information only needs to be entered  
one time — the LX200 remembers data even when the power is  
off. Note, however, that the time should be checked and reset, if  
necessary, on each observing session.  
7.  
Use the number keys to enter your Longitude as above. When  
complete, the display will look like Display 7.  
b. Location of the Observing Site  
NOTE: The SITE information cannot be entered if the telescope is  
in LAND mode.  
If the telescope is in LAND mode, the SITE menu option (Display 2)  
will appear in lower case letters (see Which Alignment  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
8. Press ENTER to complete the site information input. The  
display will go back to Display 3.  
U.S.A. TIME ZONES  
STANDARD TIME  
9.  
Press MODE to go back to Display 2.  
TIME ZONE  
HAWAII  
DAYLIGHT TIME  
+9 Hours  
10. Press MODE again to go back to Display 1.  
It is important to note that the longitude standard used in the  
LX200 starts at 0 degrees in Greenwich U.K. and increases  
Westerly only to 359 degrees 59 minutes. Many maps will show  
Easterly longitudes which cannot be entered into the keypad  
display. As an example, if your map indicates that you are at an  
Easterly longitude of 18 degrees 27 minutes, then you would enter  
341 degrees 33 minutes.  
+10 Hours  
+8 Hours  
+7 Hours  
+6 Hours  
PACIFIC  
MOUNTAIN  
+7 Hours  
+5 Hours  
+ 4 Hours  
+3 Hours  
CENTRAL  
EASTERN  
ATLANTIC  
+6 Hours  
+5 Hours  
+4 Hours  
Do not concern yourself with differences in longitude and latitude  
as they pertain to different map spheroid projections, those minor  
differences are too small to adversely affect the longitude and  
latitude data input.  
For example: You live in the Pacific Time Zone and you are on  
Daylight Time. The GMT time shift is +7 hours.  
6.  
Use the number keys to enter the GMT time zone shift  
determined from the table above. Press ENTER when done;  
the display will go back to Display 8. If you are using the  
c. Local Time and Date.  
NOTE: The Time function on the 16" LX200 telescope is a  
standard quartz clock. Like nearly any timepiece, the internal  
clock of the telescope should be periodically checked and  
updated to keep it as accurate as possible.  
LX200 East of Greenwich U.K., then you must enter  
a
-
(minus) GMT time zone shift by moving the blinking cursor  
backwards in the display with the W key and then pressing  
the NEXT key. The + (plus) sign will change to -(minus). Use  
the number keys to enter the Westerly (+) GMT time zone  
shift determined from the table above or your calculated  
Easterly (-) time zone shift.  
The local time should be set as accurately as possible, using the  
24 hour format. The local time and date are used to determine  
sidereal time (star time) and the pointing accuracy of the telescope  
will depend on the accuracy of the time entered. Choose a reliable  
source as a reference for accurate time such as your local airport,  
or telephone company. In the U.S.A. you can double check the  
accuracy of the exact minutes by dialing WWV for the universal  
coordinated time at (303) 499-7111 (be sure to enter your local  
time hour information, not the U.T. hour). For the example, we will  
use 2:40:00 P.M. on August 5, 1998.  
7.  
8.  
Press the ENTER key. This will select the DATE display  
(Display 12), with a random date showing.  
Press and Hold the ENTER key until the keypad hand  
controller beeps. The display will look like Display 13, with  
the blinking cursor over the first number.  
1. The display should look like Display 1. If it does not, press the  
MODE key until it does.  
2.  
Press the MODE key twice. The display will look like Display  
8, but with a random LOCAL and SIDE times.  
9. Use the number keys to enter the current date. The display  
should look like Display 14. Use the W and E keys to move  
the blinking cursor left and right to correct any mistakes.  
3.  
Press and HOLD the ENTER key until the keypad hand  
controller beeps (display like Display 9).  
10. Press the ENTER key when the date is correct.  
After you press the ENTER key, the keypad hand controller will  
display "Updating planetary data." The position of the planets  
depends on the date, so anytime the date is changed, the planet  
positions are recalculated.  
4.  
Using the number keys, enter the current local time to within  
5 seconds. (Remember, 2:40:00 P.M. is 14:40:00 in the 24  
hour format.) Corrections can be made by moving the  
flashing cursor using the W and E keys. The display should  
look like Display 10. (NOTE: The time should be checked  
and reset about once a month.)  
This is all the information the LX200 needs to make use of all  
features. The next steps actually align the telescope with the night  
sky.  
d. Setting Up the Telescope  
After the basic information has been entered into the telescope,  
the telescope is ready to actually set-up and use. Follow  
TELESCOPE ASSEMBLY (page 6) to set-up the telescope outside,  
and follow these steps:  
5.  
Press the ENTER key when the time is correct. The display  
will change to Display 11.  
1.  
Using the Bubble Level (14, Fig. 1) located on the telescope's  
drive base, level the telescope. This is a very important step  
because the telescope's pointing ability depends on the  
telescope being level. Make sure the bubble is precisely  
centered by adjusting the height of the three tripod legs.  
The next step is to enter the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) time  
zone shift (This procedure is a lot easier than it sounds). Simply  
look up your time zone in the table below to find the GMT time  
zone shift.  
2. Loosen the Dec. lock knob (18, Fig. 1) and position the  
optical tube assembly approximately level (so that the Dec.  
Circle (3, Fig. 1) reads 0°. Retighten the Dec. lock knob.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
3. Loosen the R.A. lock (7, Fig. 1) and rotate the telescope so  
that the R.A. pointer (9, Fig. 1) and the HA pointer (16, Fig. 1) are  
approximately in line with each other. This will position the fork arms  
so that they are parallel to the power panel (11, Fig. 1). lock the R.A.  
lock. Steps 2 and 3 are not required for the telescope to work, so  
don't worry about getting it exactly right. The telescope has some  
"illegal" positions (places where the telescope will not go) and these  
two steps insure proper operation.  
use the next month's chart. Once you identify the  
constellation, pick any of the labeled stars that is not within  
a 10 degree radius of overhead, but do not choose Polaris,  
for reasons made clear below. Polaris is also known as the  
North Star, and is shown for reference only.  
When aligning in ALTAZ, overhead stars can confuse the  
LX200 because of an illegal position that prevents the optical  
tube assembly from slewing past 90 degrees altitude to  
protect the viewfinder from hitting the fork arm. The LX200  
will track an overhead object, but it does so by moving  
higher in altitude up to the illegal position, then the drive  
speeds up and move 180 degrees in azimuth so that the  
optical tube assembly can now be lowered in altitude to keep  
up with the overhead object. Confusion arises because the  
LX200 does not know which side of 180 degrees of azimuth  
that it is on. Similarly, Polaris presents position problems in  
ALTAZ alignment because it is so close to the North  
Celestial Pole. In this region of the sky, the lines of Right  
Ascension are so close together that even the LX200's  
high-resolution encoders can yield ambiguous data.  
4.  
Turn the telescope on. After a few seconds (after the self-  
diagnostic test is comolete). the disolav will look like  
Display 15.  
5.  
6.  
Press the ENTER key. This selects the TELESCOPE  
functions. The display should look like Display 16.  
Press the NEXT key. This will move the arrow to the lower  
line (see Display 17).  
In our example of August 5, we would use the August chart,  
face North and look up about 45 degrees. Cygnus is  
probably the easiest constellation to recognize, and we will  
use the star Deneb for our example.  
Use the PREV and NEXT key to scroll through the list of  
alignment stars until the arrow is positioned on Deneb  
(Display 24).  
7.  
Press the ENTER key to select the ALIGN function. The  
display will look like Display 18. (If the display looks like  
Display 19 — with a checkmark already next to ALTAZ, go  
to step 9.)  
The TELESCOPE and OBJECT LIBRARY features are  
accessed through a series of menus, which are shown on the  
keypad hand controller display. You can scroll up or down through  
the list of choices by using the PREV and NEXT keys, and select  
the indicated menu option with the ENTER key. Menu choices  
that are shown in lower case letters are unavailable in the current  
operating mode (LAND, ALTAZ, or POLAR). If you try to select a  
lower case menu option, the keypad hand controller will emit  
three warning beeps. Three beeps always indicate an attempt to  
perform an invalid  
8.  
9.  
Press the ENTER key to activate the ALTAZ mode. The  
keypad hand controller will beep and display a checkmark  
Press the ENTER key to use the checked mode (ALTAZ).  
The keypad hand controller display will look like Display 20.  
telescope operation.  
14. Press the ENTER key to select Deneb. The keypad hand  
controller displays a message (Display 25).  
10. Press "1" to select "Star." The display screen will now look  
like Display 21.  
15. Center the alignment star (Deneb in our example) in the  
eyepiece of the telescope. You can manually move the  
telescope by loosening the Dec. lock knob and R.A. lock or  
electrically by using the N, S, W, and E keys. If moving the  
telescope electrically, be sure to use the speed keys, SLEW  
to get close, FIND to center in the viewfinder, and CNTR to  
center the star in the eyepiece. When the star is centered,  
press ENTER.  
next to the ALTAZ (see Display 19).  
11. If you have not already leveled the telescope, do so now.  
When the telescope is level, press ENTER. The display will  
look like Display 22.  
The telescope is now aligned and fully functional, and  
automatically begins to track objects. From this point on, make all  
telescope movements using of the keypad hand controller. Manual  
movements by loosening the Dec. or R.A. locks will cause the  
LX200 to "lose" position, requiring realignment.  
12. This message simply reminds you what you should do next.  
Press ENTER to show a display like Display 23.  
e. Using the MODE Key  
The LX200 has 5 basic keypad hand controller displays, and  
the MODE key is used to move between them. The 5 modes  
are:  
1. Telescope Functions. The TELESCOPE mode is where all  
telescope functions are changed or activated and the  
OBJECT LIBRARY is where the features of the object library  
are accessed.  
13. Using the monthly star charts (APPENDIX B, page 29) pick an  
alignment star. Look at the chart for the current month and  
face the direction indicated. The constellations shown are  
easily found  
even in the city. The charts are  
approximately 90 degrees wide, with the top of the chart  
indicating straight up. If the time is after 9:00 PM, then  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13  
3.  
Follow the keypad display prompts to choose and center the  
the second alignment star. Be sure to use the keypad to slew  
to the second star. After pressing the ENTER key in the last  
2. Telescope Position. The first display shows the RA and  
DEC (telescope position in stellar coordinates) and the  
second display (accessed by pressing the ENTER key)  
shows the telescope position in ALTAZ coordinates.  
step,  
the  
keypad  
display  
should  
show  
the  
TELESCOPE/OBJECT LIBRARY screen.  
3. Time and Date. The first display shows local and Sidereal  
time and the second display (accessed by pressing the  
ENTER key) shows the date.  
Important Note: Whenever using either of the 2-Star  
alignment procedures (at a known SITE or at an unknown  
SITE), choosing the proper two stars will determine the pointing  
accuracy of the telescope. Choose two stars that are not too  
close together try to use stars that are at least 90° apart. Do  
not use Polaris because RA changes very fast at the Pole and  
minor centering errors translate to large RA pointing errors.  
Also, avoid stars near the zenith (straight up) since azimuth  
changes very fast in this area. Generally speaking, choosing  
two stars as far apart as possible will yield very accurate  
pointing, often within a few arc minutes.  
4.  
Timer and Freq. This display is a countdown timer and  
allows the user to change drive rates. These are advanced  
features.  
5. All Off. This mode simply turns off all displays and  
backlighting. You can also adjust the backlighting  
brightness by pressing the ENTER key and using the PREV  
and NEXT keys to adjust the brightness.  
f. Library Object Keys  
While in any of the 5 main keypad display modes, you can directly  
access the library objects by using the M, STAR, or CNGC keys  
(see APPENDIX C, page 31, of this manual for more information on  
the 64,359 Object Library). Simply press an object key, and type  
in the number of the object desired, followed by ENTER. For  
example, a good first object for the first part of the year is M42 —  
the Great Orion Nebula.  
The LX200 calculates the distance between the two stars that you  
chose in the alignment steps and compares this to the distance  
that you actually slewed the telescope. This is a check to be sure  
you centered the correct stars during the alignment steps. Should  
the LX200 discover a discrepancy, the keypad will display an  
"Align Mismatch  
Check Stars" message. If you get this  
message after aligning the telescope, check that you are using the  
correct stars and align again.  
Press the M key, the 4 key, the 2 key, and finally the ENTER key.  
The display will show data on the object (name, rating, object  
type, brightness, size). Now press GO TO. The telescope will  
automatically slew to M42.  
c. Unknown SITE  
To use the LX200 telescope at an unknown location, use the  
following procedure:  
If the object entered is not above the horizon, the keypad hand  
controller will display the message "Object Below Horizon."  
1. Select site #5 (UNKNOWN) from the SITE menu.  
NOTE: This site cannot be edited like site numbers 1 to 4 as  
described in Entering Basic Information, page 10.  
Other good first objects (if above the horizon) are any of the M  
objects — from M1 to M 110, and the planets. To find a planet  
enter: (NOTE: 903 is the Moon.)  
2.  
Follow the keypad display prompts to select and center the  
two alignment stars.  
OBJECT LIBRARY PLANET LEGEND  
As described above, the LX200 will check the accuracy of the  
PLANET  
STAR #  
PLANET  
STAR #  
two stars and give the "Align Mismatch  
message if it detects an error.  
Check Stars"  
MERCURY  
VENUS  
MARS  
901  
902  
904  
SATURN  
URANUS  
NEPTUNE  
906  
907  
908  
d. Which Alignment Method to Use?  
JUPITER  
905  
PLUTO  
909  
Each of the three method described above has advantages and  
disadvantages. The following table summarizes these  
properties.  
4. Star Alignment  
The 2-Star initialization routines provide three options for aligning  
1-Star Known 2-Star Known 2-Star  
Unknown  
the LX200 telescope when in the ALTAZ mode.  
Pointing  
Accuracy  
Determined By:  
2-Star  
Alignment  
Level of  
Telescope  
2-Star  
Alignment  
NOTE: The 2-Star initialization routines only apply to the ALTAZ  
alignment mode (see MODE FUNCTIONS, page 16, for POLAR  
and LAND mode initialization).  
The first and second options require that entry of the SITE and  
TIME information as described in Entering Basic Information  
(page 10). The third option is used when the SITE information is  
not known or has not been entered into the LX200's memory.  
Atmospheric  
Refraction  
Correction*  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Atmospheric  
Refraction  
Correction  
Level of  
Telescope  
Level  
of Telescope  
Not  
Applicable  
a. 1-Star with Known SITE  
The 1-Star alignment routine was explained in detail in Setting Up  
the Telescope (page 11).  
Determined By:  
b. 2-Star at Known SITE  
When Best Used Best used  
when the  
Best used on a Best used  
transportable when the  
telescope with SITE  
To use the 2-Star alignment procedure at a known site, follow  
telescope is  
these steps:  
permanently  
mounted and  
accurately  
the SITE  
information is  
not available  
1. Select the 2-Star alignment (by pressing the "2" key); the  
keypad display will prompt you to level the base. This  
leveling step requires a rough level only and, unlike the 1-  
Star alignment routine, does not affect the pointing accuracy  
of the telescope. (See Section d. below for a summary of the  
differences in telescope operation when selecting each of  
the three alignment procedures.)  
information  
available  
leveled  
* Atmospheric Refraction Correction: Light from an astronomical object  
is "bent," (refracted) as it passes through the atmosphere. This bending is  
more pronounced near the horizon because there is more atmosphere for  
the light to pass through, and it shifts the apparent position of the star. The  
LX200 calculates this bending and compensates for it when slewing to  
objects near the horizon.  
2. After leveling the base and pressing ENTER, follow the  
keypad display prompts to select the first alignment star.  
Slew to that star using the N, S, E, and W keys.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
2. MODE Key  
The MODE key (2, Fig.6) cycles through the five modes of the  
LX200, and is used to exit from specific menu files.  
THE LX200 KEYPAD HAND CONTROLLER  
Designed to make you a better astronomer, the integration of  
optics, mechanics, electronics, and software in the LX200  
Maksutov Cassegrain or Schmidt Cassegrain Telescope is easily  
mastered. So easy, in fact that the telescope becomes a natural  
extension of the observer.  
3. GO TO Key  
The GO TO key (3, Fig. 6) causes the LX200 to automatically slew  
to specific library entry coordinates. The GO TO key also produces  
The LX200 gives you virtually every telescope function possible  
with every control in a compact hand held console. The red LCD  
backlit keypad has tactile touch buttons (some of which are brighter  
than others), designed to have the right feel even if you wear  
gloves. Its red LCD backlit display, key arrangement, and easy to  
understand information allow you to focus the telescope and your  
mind on the subject at hand.  
a
blinking cursor in the GO TO menu file of the  
COORDINATES/GO TO mode, to allow new Right Ascension and  
Declination coordinates to be entered.  
4. Direction Keys  
Labeled N, S, E, and W, (4, Fig. 6) these four keys make the LX200  
move, or slew, in a specific direction, with an option of four  
different speeds, explained later. During entry to change a value,  
the E and W keys can be used to move the blinking cursor back  
and forth across the LCD display, so that if an error is made during  
entry, it can be erased and changed.  
The LX200 keypad hand controller is a dual axis drive corrector  
with periodic error control; an information display center for the  
computerized library;  
a
digital coordinate readout system;  
a
pulsing, illuminated reticle eyepiece brightness controller; a two  
speed electric focuser controller, and a red LED flashlight!  
The remaining 12 keys have multiple functions, there are up and  
down arrow keys, and numbered keys from 0 through 9. Each one  
of these keys also has alternate functions listed above the arrow  
symbols and numbers. The ALT LED light is only visible when  
entering numerical data. A description of the individual keys  
follows:  
You will find within a few minutes of powering up the LX200 that  
the keypad becomes warm, which is normal for the system. The  
electronics utilize a heat sink as a means to provide the correct  
operating environment temperature for the LCD display even in  
sub-zero weather. If you are in these colder conditions, the  
display may not be visible until the keypad has transferred enough  
heat. This process can take a few minutes upon powering up the  
telescope. While severe cold weather is not damaging to the  
electronics, it is advised to keep the keypad in a warmer area to  
allow immediate proper display performance.  
5. Speed Keys (SLEW, FIND, CENTER, and GUIDE)  
These keys (6, Fig. 6) allow you to set the rate of movement (slew)  
speed in the drives of the LX200, as activated by the N,  
5. E, and W keys. The chosen rate is indicated by the speed  
indicator illuminated LED beside the rate key that you have  
pressed, the speed rates are SLEW (4 degrees per second), FIND  
(1 degrees per second), CNTR (16X sidereal rate), and GUIDE  
(2X sidereal rate).  
NOTE: All of the slew speeds will drive the LX200 in all four  
directions, except for GUIDE. The 2X sidereal speed in GUIDE  
has one difference in that it will not interrupt the Right  
Ascension tracking direction to make Easterly (for Northern  
hemisphere) or Westerly (for Southern hemisphere)  
adjustments; it will merely slow down the tracking drive to one  
half its normal speed. You will find, however, that the slower  
drive will move the image opposite of the tracking direction,  
without disturbing the smooth drive action. This performance is  
absolutely essential when making astrophotographs.  
SLEW, FIND, CENTER, and GUIDE keys also have numbers  
listed 7, 4, 1, and 0 respectively. When editing a value, the  
multiple function of each of these keys is realized. SLEW and  
FIND are also used to set the "fast" focus speed for the electric  
focuser accessory option, while CNTR and GUIDE set the "slow"  
focus speed. There are other special functions for the CNTR and  
GUIDE keys that are discussed in the RET KEY operations.  
6. RET Key  
Typically used for guiding the LX200 during an astrophotograph,  
the RET key (5, Fig. 6) is used to change the brightness and  
pulse rate of the optional corded style illuminated reticle eyepiece.  
Pressing either the PREV and NEXT (up and down arrow) keys  
while holding down the RET key, alters the reticle brightness level  
up or down.  
The LX200 keypad buttons are described as follows:  
When guiding on very faint stars, you may find it helpful to pulse  
the light from the LED so that the reticle crosshairs blink on and  
off. You will be able to adjust the reticle brightness as well as adjust  
the pulse rates. There are three pulse rates that can be used, all  
with a one second pulse interval. The continuous illumination  
control and pulse rates are set by holding down the RET key and  
pressing one of the following keys; GUIDE (100% on, no pulsing),  
CNTR (50% on, 50% off), MAP (25% on, 75% off), CNGC (10%  
on, 90% off).  
1. ENTER Key  
The ENTER key (1, Fig. 6) is used to select a menu file, a file  
option, or to edit a value. To select a file or an option, press and  
release the ENTER key. The LX200 will give a short beep tone and  
perform the action that you have requested. To edit a value, press  
and hold the ENTER key until a double beep tone is heard and a  
blinking cursor appears in the display. There are some other  
specific situations where the ENTER key is used. These are  
described in detail where necessary. From now on, the two types  
of presses will be called 'press' and 'press and hold."  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
THE LX200 POWER PANEL  
The power panel incorporates a power switch and LED indicators  
showing power on with a current ammeter to show power draw.  
7. FOCUS Key  
The FOCUS key (9, Fig. 6) allows 2 speed electric focus control of  
the optional Meade #1206 Electric Focuser (or equivalent corded  
electric focusers such as the Meade Model #1200A). To activate,  
press either the SLEW or FIND key (for fast focusing), or the  
CNTR or GUIDE key (for slow focusing), press and hold the  
FOCUS key, and then press and hold the PREV or NEXT keys for  
near and far focus.  
The power panel has all of the connectors for the AC or DC power  
input, the DEC Motor, and the keypad. There are connectors  
designed to accept optional accessories such as  
autoguiding camera, the optional Meade Field De-Rotator, the  
Meade #1206 Electric Focuser, and an illuminated reticle  
eyepiece. There is even a connector for RS-232 communication  
that will allow you to perform every function of the keypad from  
your personal computer. An illustration and a description of the 16"  
LX200 power panel features follows:  
a
CCD  
8. MAP Key  
The Map key (11, Fig. 6) turns on and off the red LED 'flashlight'  
that is located at the top of the keypad. The deep red LED light will  
protect your night vision while you search for  
accessory or examine a star chart.  
a
particular  
1. ON/OFF Switch  
When the ON/OFF Switch (7, Fig. 7) is moved to the ON position,  
the power light indicator, the Current Ammeter, and the keypad all  
light up. You will hear the drive motors rev which momentarily pegs  
the Ammeter, then the drive motors shift to a slower speed which  
allows the RA worm gear to find its centering position for  
calibrating the Smart Drive, then resuming to an even slower  
tracking speed. The keypad display reads "Meade," then the  
version of the software is indicated briefly before defaulting to the  
TELESCOPE/OBJECT LIBRARY. Within 15 seconds, the  
planetary orbital calculations with their corresponding apparent  
sizes and magnitudes, and current stellar precession  
calculations are made. Every computer function is checked, and  
the LX200 diagnostics are complete.  
9. Object Keys (M, STAR, and CNGC)  
These keys (10, Fig. 6) allow direct access to the LX200's Object  
Library any time that you are not editing value or setting a  
a
parameter, or selecting a file menu. Use the Object keys when you  
are at a "top level" of a mode. After pressing one of these keys, the  
keypad's display will give a blinking cursor, allowing you to enter  
the catalog number for objects listed in the library (see APPENDIX  
C, page 31). After entry press the ENTER key. To see the entered  
object press the GO TO key. A brief description of the catalog key  
symbols are; M (Messier objects), STAR (stars and planets), and  
CNGC (Computerized New General Catalog).  
The 16" LX200 has several object libraries which are accessed  
with the STAR and CNGC keys.  
2. N/S Switch  
When you press the STAR or CNGC keys, the display will show  
which object library you are currently in and wait for a number  
entry, as described above.  
The recessed N/S Switch (8, Fig.7) converts the LX200 for  
operation in the Northern or Southern hemisphere, making the  
drive reverse its' tracking direction. Before power up, the  
appropriate N or S switch position should be made, as the LX200  
will not recognize a change made on the N/S switch afterwards.  
Use a pen or small tool to slide the switch appropriately. Be sure  
before you travel across the equator, that you are setting the  
proper + or - latitude SITE entry for your final destination.  
To switch to a different library, press the ENTER key instead of  
entering a number.  
The keypad display will show a menu of libraries available. Move  
the cursor to the desired library and press ENTER to select.  
The 16" LX200 will "remember" the database you last accessed.  
Each time you press the STAR or CNGC keys, the same object  
database will be displayed on the first line of the keypad display.  
3. Ammeter  
he Ammeter display (1, Fig. 7) is a series of vertical red LED bars.  
Each bar that is fully lit represents 0.3 ampere (300 milli-amperes)  
of current draw. The LED Ammeter represents its lowest value on  
the extreme left of the scale. During normal tracking speeds, the  
Ammeter will show about three fully lit LED bars and at times a  
fourth that is partially lit, indicating about 900 to 1000 milli-amps or  
0.9 to 1.0 amps of current draw (when a slew is initiated, the  
ammeter will peg the scale momentarily showing the inertia load,  
this effect is entirely normal). The current draw information can be  
useful if you are trying to calculate how much battery life you will  
have during an observing session.  
10. PREV AND NEXT Keys  
The PREV and NEXT (up and down arrow) keys (12, Fig. 6) move  
the display LCD arrow up and down the menu files and menu file  
options, so that you may choose an individual selection to enter.  
These keys are also used when adjusting the RET brightness  
range, or when activating the electric focuser. PREV and NEXT  
work as well to select the objects from the Object Library when  
using START FIND.  
As an example, if the ammeter has  
four bars lit, indicating 1.2 amps  
and you are using a 12 amp hour  
battery,  
then  
to  
know  
the  
approximate number of hours of life  
the battery would yield by dividing  
12 by 1.2. This indicates a battery  
life of 10 hours.  
4. DEC Motor Connector  
The DEC Motor Port (11, Fig. 7) is a  
DB-9 socket, designed to accept  
the supplied coil cord. One end of  
the supplied coil cord plugs in to the  
power panel and the other plugs  
into the DEC MOTOR socket in the  
right fork arm to power the  
declination motor.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16  
5. CCD Connector  
MODE FUNCTIONS  
To view the separate modes within the LX200 system, press the  
MODE button located between the ENTER and GO TO keys at the  
top of the hand controller. Simple entry and editing of information  
in the different modes contained within the system will customize  
the operation of your LX200 to perform virtually any of your  
observing requirements. Better still, all of the critical information  
such as time, location, alignment type, and many other functions  
are kept in memory...even with the LX200 turned off!  
The CCD Port (10, Fig. 7) allows direct interface from popular  
aftermarket CCD autoguiding/imaging cameras with their  
compatible connecting cables to accomplish autoguiding for non-  
attended astrophotography. The CCD cameras effectively watch  
a star and detect slight movements. When star movements are  
detected, signals from the CCD electronics make drive corrections  
in the LX200, to bring the star to a home position.  
Most CCD autoguiding/imaging cameras are supplied with a cable,  
which is compatible with the LX200 port. If your CCD unit does not  
have a cable, one can be obtained from the CCD manufacturer, or  
you can make your own cable using the following table of  
information.  
The type of alignment, the objects that you see, the location that  
you observe from, the tracking speeds of the drives, all of the clock  
and timing functions, the position information, and even the  
brightness level of the backlit keypad are defined by the  
information that you give and/ or the commands that you edit,  
through five different modes of the LX200 computerized hand  
controller.  
CCD Connector Pin  
LX200 Assignment  
#1  
#2  
#3  
#4  
#5  
#6  
Normally Closed  
West  
Once you have selected the desired mode, you can then select the  
individual file within the mode by pressing the PREV or NEXT key  
(up and down arrow key) in the bottom right hand portion of the  
hand controller, moving the LCD arrow up or down beside the file  
description. Although you will only be able to see two menu  
selections at a time in the keypad display, you will see more as you  
continue to press the PREV and NEXT keys.  
North  
Ground  
South  
East  
6. Power 12 vDC Connector  
When the desired file is chosen, press the ENTER key to view the  
files menu. To choose an individual menu, again use the PREV or  
NEXT key to run the LCD arrow up or down the files menu. To  
explore a menu selection, again press the ENTER key. In some  
modes there will be options for a files menu selection, in others  
you will only enter data.  
The power 12 vDC connector (9, Fig. 7) is designed to accept  
either the standard-equipment AC Converter or the optional DC  
Power Cord. The acceptable voltage range (under load) is from  
12 to 18 volts.  
7. Keypad Connector  
At any time that you wish to return to main file heading in  
particular mode, just press MODE and it will behave as an exit key.  
a
The keypad connector (6, Fig. 7) is a 4 pin phone jack connector  
socket, designed to accept standard 4 pin phone jack coil cords.  
One end of the supplied coil cord plugs into the keypad port, the  
other end plugs into the LX200 keypad.  
1. Mode One: TELESCOPE/ OBJECT LIBRARY  
This is the mode that the LX200 will default to after the instrument  
completes its self-check, when the LX200 is first turned on. The  
TELESCOPE/OBJECT LIBRARY mode can be thought of as  
command central. It is here that we can select the way that we  
want the LX200 to perform mechanically, and where we can  
explore and select from its extensive library of stored objects.  
8. Reticle Connector  
The Reticle connector (5, Fig. 7) accepts optional accessory  
corded, plug-in style illuminated reticle eyepieces such as the  
optional Meade 12mm Illuminated Reticle Eyepiece, or the Meade  
Series 4000 Plossl 9mm Illuminated Reticle Eyepiece (corded  
style), to allow brightness control and on/off pulsing rates to be set  
from the LX200 keypad.  
To explore either the TELESCOPE menu file or the OBJECT  
LIBRARY menu file, move the LCD arrow to the appropriate  
selection by using the PREV or the NEXT key and press the  
ENTER key.  
9. Focuser Connector  
The focuser connector (4, Fig. 7) accepts optional accessory  
corded, plug in style electric focusers such as the Meade #1206  
Electric Focuser, to allow electric focus adjustment control from  
the LX200 keypad.  
a. TELESCOPE Menu File  
Below are the 14 selections of the TELESCOPE menu file,  
illustrating the individual menu files and file options.  
1. SITE: The SITE menu option allows you to enter up to four of  
your favorite viewing locations in longitude and latitude. The  
entered longitude and latitude is compared by the LX200's  
computer to your local time, GMT offset, and calendar date  
to accurately calculate celestial coordinates. Once entered,  
the information is stored in the telescope's internal memory,  
you need never re-enter the same information. To enter new  
site information or to change an old one, see QUICK START,  
page 9.  
10. RS-232 Connector  
The RS-232 connector (2, Fig. 7) allows personal computer  
interface to allow communications at 9600 baud to access every  
feature of the LX200 keypad. Many popular astronomy programs  
are available which directly interface with Meade LX200  
telescopes, including Epoch 2000sk Sky Software by Meade  
Instruments Corp. In APPENDIX F (page 58) of this manual is a  
wiring schematic to make your own RS-232 connector cord, a cord  
test program, a demonstration program, and the LX200 Command  
Set for writing programs. Meade Instruments supplies this  
information for professional programmers. Meade Instruments  
Corporation does not offer support or advice for writing software  
for the RS-232 option.  
You can choose any one of the four site options (or the  
UNKNOWN site) at your convenience, without the bother of  
entering longitude and latitude every time you use the  
LX200. Once the site is chosen, exit the SITE menu by  
pressing the MODE key.  
2. ALIGN: The Align menu selection of the TELESCOPE file  
11. Aux Connector  
demonstrates the unique ability to transform the LX200 into  
The Auxiliary connector (3, Fig. 7) is used for the 7" Maksutov fan  
an Altazimuth, celestial tracking telescope,  
a
polar-  
power.  
equatorial celestial tracking telescope, or land spotting  
scope with electric Altazimuth movements within three  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17  
options, which are; ALTAZ, POLAR, and LAND.  
TELESCOPE mode and press the ENTER key.  
Ignore the keypad display instructions to return the  
telescope to 90 degrees in Declination and 00 HA.  
Instead, press the GO TO key and the LX200 will slew  
to the calculated position of where the pole star should  
be.  
Assuming that you have already entered correct local time,  
latitude, and longitude (see QUICK START, page 9) you are  
ready to choose a particular type of alignment, by pressing  
the NEXT or PREV key to run the arrow beside the desired  
option of ALTAZ, POLAR, or LAND, and then pressing the  
ENTER key. The display will then give you specific  
instructions from this point that will literally walk you through  
the chosen alignment type.  
Re-center the pole star in the field of view in the  
eyepiece using only the adjustments on the pier in  
altitude and azimuth.  
a.  
ALTAZ: ALTAZ (Altazimuth) requires that you mount the  
LX200 directly to the top of the field tripod (with the  
power panel facing North), and adjust the leg extensions  
of the tripod until the instrument is level. You are then  
required to align on one or two of the bright stars in its  
look up table of 33 alignment stars. This allows your  
LX200 to track in altitude and azimuth simultaneously  
for visual observations, or very brief (under five  
minutes) exposure astrophotography or CCD imaging  
(longer exposures will require the Field De-Rotator).  
ALTAZ allows you to fully access the Object Library as  
well as all other telescope functions. Complete  
instructions for using ALTAZ are in the QUICK START  
(page 9).  
Press the ENTER key, and the LX200 will once again  
slew to a bright star overhead. Center this star using  
the N, S, E, or W keys, then press ENTER.  
NOTE: Pressing the MODE key at any point in the  
alignment routine aborts the routine and exit to the top  
menu.  
After each 15 minute interval you will find that the pole  
star becomes more accurately centered each time. You  
can repeat the intervals as often as you like to obtain  
the highest accuracy. An optional illuminated reticle  
crosshair eyepiece makes the job of centering the star  
easy.  
There may be situations when it is impossible to see the  
pole star due to something blocking your line of sight.  
On such an occasion, just press the ENTER key for the  
POLAR option so that it has a check next to it, then  
follow the instructions in Precise Polar Alignment,  
page 30. You will require the use of an illuminated  
reticle crosshair eyepiece* to complete the task. Once  
finished, follow the steps below for a permanently  
mounted LX200 section to access the Object Library.  
b.  
POLAR: POLAR allows you to use the 16" LX200  
(mounted on a permanent pier set to your latitude) as  
an equatorial telescope. With the LX200 powered up,  
the POLAR file option selected, and the field tripod  
leveled, the telescope should be adjusted so that the  
Declination setting circle (3, Fig. 1) is set to 90 degrees  
and the telescope is rotated to the 00 hour angle (HA)  
position in Right Ascension. In this position, the  
viewfinder (Fig. 1) is up-side down, and the R.A.  
pointer (4, Fig. 5), the 00 line of the R.A. setting circle  
(3, Fig. 5), and the HA pointer (5, Fig. 5) all line up. (If  
you do not start at the 00 H.A. position, the telescope will  
point to the ground instead of the sky, when the keypad  
display chooses its second star.) Press the ENTER key  
and the LX200 will determine and slew to the precise  
off-set of the pole star in Declination and Right  
Ascension.  
d. The Permanently Mounted, Polar Aligned LX200:  
For those who will permanently mount the LX200 in an  
observatory, or wish to use the already polar aligned  
telescope for several nights in succession, it is  
recommended that a high precision polar alignment  
be made with one of the methods described above.  
Once done, however, you need not bother yourself to  
go through a polar alignment routine on successive  
nights (provided that you do not move the instrument on  
the pier) to access the Object Library and enjoy near  
perfect tracking.  
At this point you need only aim the instrument at the pole  
star (see APPENDIX C, page 31, if the pole star is not  
visible) and center it in the eyepiece field using only the  
altitude and azimuth adjustments on the pier. Once  
done, you again press the ENTER key and the LX200  
To bypass the polar alignment sequence, follow the  
steps outlined below:  
Return to the POLAR menu option and place a check  
next to it by pressing the ENTER key.  
will choose and slew to  
a
very bright star that is  
overhead and can usually be seen in the field of view of  
the viewfinder. At this point, center the bright star using  
only the Right Ascension and Declination adjustments  
of the telescope (either manually by loosening the locks  
only or electrically), then press ENTER. You can now  
access every every function of the LX200.  
Then directly enter the catalog number of an object that  
you are familiar with in the sky by pressing the M,  
STAR, or CNGC key (see APPENDIX D, page 34, for  
information on the Object Library) and press the ENTER  
key again.  
Manually center the familiar object in the eyepiece of  
the telescope.  
c. Refined Polar Alignment: Astrophotographers  
routinely require polar alignments of the highest  
accuracy for the finest guiding characteristics. Your  
initial polar alignment can be refined by using the  
LX200's electronics by using a slightly different method  
in the POLAR menu option. The steps outlined below  
should be performed in two or three 15 minute intervals.  
At each interval the telescope will slew to the area  
where the pole star should be centered in the optics.  
You may find that the pole star is somewhat off-center in  
the eyepiece showing the alignment error that may have  
been made during your initial setup. Re-center the pole  
star during each interval using the tripod adjustments  
only (see APPENDIX B, page 29) in altitude and azimuth,  
then follow the rest of the routine.  
Press and hold the ENTER key until the display reads  
"Coordinates matched."  
You have now synchronized the Object Library and the  
LX200 will correctly access every other object in the  
sky.  
e.  
LAND: The LAND menu option transforms the ALTAZ  
(Altazimuth) mounted LX200 into an electric slewing  
spotting scope. In this mode, continuous tracking is  
canceled and all of the celestial modes and menus are  
non-functional, showing lower case lettering in the  
displays and a beep tone if you try to enter one of them.  
The LX200 will slew at any one of the four speeds of  
SLEW, FIND, CNTR, and GUIDE as activated by  
pressing the appropriately marked keys on the left  
Return to the POLAR menu option in the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18  
side of the keypad. Altazimuth coordinate readings can  
still be displayed in the coordinates mode (see MODE 2,  
page 22). Refer to QUICK START (page 9) for the LAND  
menu option, for full operating procedures. You will  
also find that the addition of the Meade #928 45-Degree  
Erect Image Prism or the Meade #924 Porro Prism  
instead of the standard supplied star diagonal prism, will  
give the normal right-side-up and left-to-right views that  
you are accustomed to when using a spotting scope.  
corrections immediately by pressing any of the direction (N,  
S, E, W) keys to keep the star on the crosshair of the guiding  
eyepiece. It is suggested that you train in DEC LEARN for at  
least half of your intended exposure time for an astrophoto.  
The longer that you train, the more accurate the DEC  
LEARN will be. Once the desired time is finished, press  
ENTER and the training will cease. The Smart Drive will then  
determine how many key pushes that you gave in N and S  
and choose the direction based from which direction received  
more commands. It then averages the time between key  
pushes in the chosen direction. In this way, the Smart Drive  
can correct for Declination drift (should your polar alignment  
be slightly off), or will allow you to more precisely guide on  
non-stellar objects, such as comets, asteroids, etc.  
3.  
SMART: The SMART menu file controls the Smart Drive and  
allows you to train almost all of the periodic error from the  
Right Ascension drive worm gear (errors induced by tiny gear  
imperfections that tend to slightly speed up or slow down the  
drive tracking speed, that occur in a regular 8 minute pattern,  
or for every rotation of the worm) for greatly enhancing the  
tracking characteristics or the amount of East and West drift  
of your LX200. This greatly simplifies guiding during  
astrophotography. The menu also has provisions for  
correcting Declination drift. Smart Drive will retain the  
training given to the R/A drive, even after the telescope is  
turned off. There is of course a way to erase any training  
given to it at your command.  
To play back your DEC LEARN training, move the LCD arrow to  
DEC CORRECT and press ENTER. To halt the play back press  
ENTER again. To erase the DEC LEARN • training, either move  
the LCD arrow back to DEC LEARN and press ENTER twice or  
turn the LX200 off.  
4. 12/24 HR: The 12/24 HR menu selection of the TELESCOPE  
file simply toggles between a 12 and 24 hour display of  
local time in the time mode.  
The SMART menu has five options. They are; LEARN,  
UPDATE, ERASE, DEC LEARN, and DEC CORRECT. To  
use the Smart Drive, the LX200 must be mounted with the  
optional equatorial wedge (see APPENDIX A, page 25),  
equipped with an illuminated reticle eyepiece*, and used in  
the POLAR align menu selection. Be sure to train the Smart  
Drive in the 60.1 Hz Quartz setting that the LX200 will be  
automatically set at power up. Thereafter, you can adjust this  
setting in the TIMER/ FREQ mode and still enjoy the periodic  
error correction.  
To toggle between 12 and 24 hours displays, move the  
arrow to 12/24HR and press ENTER. To return to the  
original setting, press ENTER again.  
5.  
6.  
HELP: The HELP menu selection of the TELESCOPE file is  
an electronic mini-manual that will briefly describe the  
function of each command key on the LX200 keypad.  
To use this menu, move the arrow with the PREV or NEXT  
key to HELP and press ENTER. To read the lines of text, use  
the PREV and NEXT keys. To exit, press MODE.  
Once a polar alignment has been completed, your LX200 will  
point to a bright star overhead that will be near the Celestial  
Equator. This will be a good star to train the Smart Drive on.  
You can of course, move to another star just as long as you  
are near 0 degrees in declination and more or less overhead  
in Right Ascension. Now is good time to set the brightness  
and/ or the pulse rate (see THE LX200 KEYPAD HAND  
CONTROLLER, page 14) of the illuminated reticle on the guide  
star and practice guiding for a few minutes.  
REVERSE N/S: The REVERSE N/S menu selection of the  
TELESCOPE file reverses the direction of the telescope in  
North and South movements (e.g., when you press the N  
key the scope will move South or down instead of North or  
up). This is especially useful during some guiding  
applications in imaging and observing.  
To use the REVERSE N/S menu, move the arrow to  
REVERSE N/S and press ENTER. If you wish to return the  
direction commands to the original setting, press ENTER  
again.  
To actually begin training the Smart Drive, move the LCD  
arrow to LEARN by using the PREV or NEXT key and press  
ENTER. There will be numbers that will appear next to the  
LEARN display, that will begin counting down to zero. The  
highest number that can appear is 240. The period of the  
worm is eight minutes and the number represents a sector of  
the worm wheel which will change to the next lower digit  
every two seconds. As the keypad display approaches sector  
5, an alarm will alert you that training is about to commence.  
At this point try to keep the star on the same location of the  
crosshair during the eight minute training sequence by  
pressing the N, S, E, and W keys. After eight minutes, the  
training is over and Smart Drive will play back the drive  
corrections automatically, dramatically improving the R.A.  
drive tracking.  
7.  
REVERSE E/W: The REVERSE E/W menu selection of the  
TELESCOPE file reverses the direction of the telescope in  
East and West movements (e.g., when you press the W key,  
the telescope will move East instead of West).  
To use the REVERSE E/W menu, move the arrow to  
REVERSE E/W and press ENTER. If you wish to return the  
direction commands to the original setting, press ENTER  
again.  
8.  
BALANCE: When adding optional equipment to the LX200,  
like a heavy camera, it is often necessary to rebalance the  
telescope using the Meade #1404 Tube Balance Weight  
Systems.  
If you wish to further refine the accuracy, move the LCD  
arrow to UPDATE and press ENTER and follow the same  
instructions as above. This can be done in UPDATE as many  
times as you wish. With each training the Smart Drive will  
average your training sequences.  
Selecting option #8 from the TELESCOPE menu moves the  
LX200 telescope rapidly up and down in Declination. This  
provides an easy way to determine when the telescope is  
balanced in the Declination axis. (Remember, loosening  
the Dec. lock to check the balance will cause the LX200 to  
lose alignment.)  
If you find that you have made a mistake in training (e.g.  
pushed E instead of W when you should have), you can  
eliminate the memory by moving the LCD arrow to ERASE  
and press ENTER.  
When the telescope is out of balance, the LX200 will draw  
more current when slewing in the "heavy" direction and the  
Dec. motor will sound different.  
A star that drifts consistently North or South during guiding,  
can also be corrected for. Move the LCD arrow to DEC  
LEARN and press ENTER. Begin making drive  
After selecting option #8, watch the Ammeter and listen to  
the Declination motor to determine when the LX200 is  
balanced.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19  
NOTE: If this star is not in the field of view or if it is obstructed  
by a land object, the other two stars are available. Use the  
PREV and NEXT keys to cycle through the three closest stars.  
9. HI-PRECISION: The High-Precision Pointing feature of  
LX200 allows for very precise pointing of the telescope. By  
incorporating the unique LX200 SYNC command, 0.3 arc-  
sec resolution encoders, and high-speed DC servo motors,  
observers can now place objects in the telescope's field of  
view with 1 arc-minute or better pointing accuracy. This  
makes critical image placement applications, such as CCD  
imaging, possible.  
c. The telescope will slew to the selected object or position.  
10. SLEW RATE: Option #10 in the TELESCOPE menu is for  
changing the slew rate of the LX200 telescope. Slowing down  
the slew rate will result in less noise as the telescope moves  
and will also use a little less power. To change the slew rate,  
follow these steps:  
Normal telescope pointing accuracy is better than 5 arc-  
minutes when doing a casual alignment, which is more than  
accurate enough for most observing applications. (A "casual"  
alignment is one that uses the UNKNOWN SITE or one that  
is done without the use of a reticle eyepiece to exactly  
center the alignment stars.) This type of alignment will put  
objects into the field of view of most eyepieces and is more  
than adequate for almost any visual observing application.  
a.  
Press the MODE key on the keypad until the  
TELESCOPE/OBJECT LIBRARY menu appears. The  
cursor should be next to the TELESCOPE option — if  
not, press the PREV key to move the cursor up one  
space.  
b. Press ENTER to select the TELESCOPE functions.  
A "critical" alignment will improve the pointing accuracy of  
c.  
Press the PREV or NEXT keys to move the cursor to  
option #10: SLEW RATE. On the right hand part of  
the display, the number 4 is displayed. This  
represents the current slew rate in degrees per  
second.  
the telescope to  
2
arc-minutes or better. This type of  
alignment requires accurate SITE information, time, date,  
proper selection of the two alignment stars, and a reticle  
eyepiece to exactly center the alignment stars. These steps  
generally require only a few extra seconds to accomplish,  
and will improve the telescope's positioning by a substantial  
amount. Using the "critical" alignment will provide telescope  
positioning suitable for all but the most demanding pointing  
applications — including CCD imaging with larger chip  
cameras, like the Meade Pictor 416 and Pictor 1616 CCD  
cameras.  
d. Press the ENTER key to change the slew rate. Each  
successive ENTER key press increments the slew rate  
by 1 degree per second.  
e. After setting the desired rate, press the MODE key to  
return to the TELESCOPE/OBJECT LIBRARY menu.  
NOTE: The slew rate is NOT stored in permanent memory and  
needs to be reset each time the telescope is powered up. The  
default slew rate is 4 degrees per second.  
The HI-PRECISION feature increases the pointing  
accuracy of the LX200 to 1 arc-minute or better and also  
requires the "critical" alignment described above. This will  
yield the best pointing accuracy possible, placing objects  
onto the active area of the even the smallest CCD cameras  
available.  
11. BACKLASH: The Backlash feature is only available in the  
POLAR mode.  
When taking long exposure astrophotographs, it is  
necessary to "guide" the photograph to make sure the  
telescope is tracking perfectly, otherwise stars will appear as  
ovals instead of pinpoints. This is done by setting the LX200  
keypad to the GUIDE speed, monitoring the star location  
(e.g. with an off-axis guider), and making small  
It should be stressed that for most applications, using the  
HP feature is NOT required to get maximum enjoyment out  
of the telescope. For an evening of simple visual  
observations, the "casual" alignment is all that is required.  
Don't let the pointing precision of the telescope become more  
important than the fun of observing the night sky!  
corrections to the telescope position by using the N, S, E,  
and W keys.  
The High-Precision Pointing mode requires the "critical"  
alignment, described above, to maximize the telescope's  
pointing ability. The LX200 default condition is with HP  
disabled. To activate the HP mode, select the "hi-precision"  
option from the TELESCOPE menu (option #9). When  
selected, "HI-PRECISION" will change to upper case letters.  
When making these corrections, the R.A. motor will speed  
up or slow down (by pressing the "E" and "W" keys). The  
Declination motor, however, when activated (by pressing the  
"N" and "S" keys) will actually stop and reverse direction.  
Because of backlash in the Declination motor gearbox, there  
will be a few seconds delay before the  
telescope begins to move when reversing direction.  
When HP is active, the LX200 automatically does several  
things whenever a GO TO is initiated.  
The Dec. backlash feature compensates for the Dec. motor  
gearbox backlash and provides instant telescope movement  
when the motor is reversed.  
a. HP will search the alignment star database and find the  
three closest stars to the object (or position) entered.  
This process takes about 10 seconds and the keypad  
will show Display 26:  
To program the Dec. backlash, use this procedure:  
a. Move to option #11 from the TELESCOPE menu.  
The keypad display will show:  
'"11) BACKLASH 00"  
The "00" in the display shows the number of arc-  
seconds of backlash the LX200 is set to compensate  
for (the default setting is 0 arc-seconds).  
b. The telescope will slew to the nearest alignment  
star. These are all bright (brighter than 3rd  
magnitude) stars and far enough apart to insure  
that there will only be one in the field of view. The  
keypad display will show Display 27:  
b.  
c.  
While observing  
a
star at high power, time the  
Declination movement delay when reversing the motor  
directions (by pressing the "N" and "S" keys). Typical  
values are 2 to 4 seconds.  
The GUIDE speed for the Declination motor is 15 arc-  
seconds per second. Therefore, multiply the  
number of seconds delay by 15.  
using a reticle eyepiece, center tne star in tne neia or  
view. (Or center the star on the CCD chip if using a  
CCD camera.) Press GO TO when the star is centered.  
d. Press and hold the ENTER key for 1 second. The  
keypad will beep and a blinking cursor will appear on  
the keypad display. Enter the number determined in  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 0  
Press the ENTER key and the hand control will display the  
first object in its finding sequence. This first object is  
selected by the LX200, based off of where the instrument is  
pointing in the sky when you entered START FIND. To point  
your LX200 to the object displayed, press the GO TO key  
and it will slew to the object.  
step c, above. Press ENTER when the number is  
entered.  
e.  
Check the time delay as described in step b. If there is  
a delay, increase the compensation number. If there is  
a
slight jump when reversing direction, then the  
number is too large.  
While in the START FIND option, you can either choose the  
next object in line or skip it as you wish. In order to find the  
next object in sequence, press the NEXT key, and the  
display will show the new CNGC object. If you do not wish to  
view this object, press NEXT again. If you wish to return to a  
previously viewed object, press the PREV key until the  
desired catalog number is displayed and press the GO TO  
key. If you have set some limitations in the PARAMETERS  
When the compensation number is correct, the LX200  
telescope will move almost instantly when reversing the  
direction in Declination. This compensation feature also  
works in conjunction with . popular CCD autoguiders,  
allowing for more accurate autoguiding.  
This number is stored in permanent memory and  
should never need to be set again.  
option, it will only find those objects within your chosen  
confines.  
b. OBJECT LIBRARY Menu File  
If you find that the object is not well centered in the eyepiece  
after executing a GO TO (due to poor leveling, improper time  
input, or errors in site location), center the object; then press  
and hold the ENTER key until the display reads  
The OBJECT LIBRARY menu file is the other half of the  
TELESCOPE/OBJECT LIBRARY mode. With it you can  
become a tourist of the sky, or conduct research surveys of the  
64,359 objects. The LX200 Object Library is accessible in the  
most results-getting, user friendly system ever designed for  
observers and astrophotographers.  
"Coordinates Matched." This feature in  
essence  
synchronizes the LX200 for an area of the sky, so that the  
next object (if the leveling, time input, or site location  
information is not corrected) will be better centered,  
provided it is not too far away from the object that you  
matched coordinates to.  
The core library, essentially  
a
"greatest hits of the sky,"  
encompasses eight planets of our solar system from Mercury to  
Pluto, 351 stars (doubles, variables, pole stars), the entire  
Messier catalog of 110 objects, 7840 of the finest galaxies, diffuse  
and planetary nebulae, and globular and open star clusters  
To exit the START FIND menu selection (and cease its  
operation) to the main menu, press MODE.  
The position epoch of these objects is for real time, updated each  
time you turn on your LX200. Even the planet's positions have  
their orbits calculated! This not only qualifies the LX200 as the  
most accurate integrated object library available, it will never  
require updated software for precession of the stars or planetary  
orbital changes.  
3. FIELD: Press theENTER key to identify objects in the  
field of view of the telescope. The LX200 will display the  
object centered in the eyepiece field, and how many other  
NGC objects are in thefield at the same time (defined by  
the RADIUS parameter setting) as shown in Display 28:  
There are three primary ways to use the Object Library. You can  
directly access the library by using the M, STAR, or CNGC keys  
(see THE LX200 KEYPAD HAND CONTROLLER, page 14) and entering  
a specific catalog number, the START FIND option can be used to  
logically find objects in organized strips of the sky that can be  
custom tailored to only show the objects you wish to see with a  
selection of object types, size brightness, etc., or you can scan the  
sky and have the Object Library tell you what is in the field of view  
in the eyepiece by using the FIELD option. Below is a description  
of the four OBJECT LIBRARY menu files and file options:  
To access the OBJECT LIBRARY menu file, move the arrow to the  
OBJECT LIBRARY display by pressing the PREV or NEXT key  
while in the TELESCOPE/OBJECT LIBRARY mode and press the  
ENTER key. Now you can access the four menu selections within  
the OBJECT LIBRARY by moving the arrow to the desired menu  
selection by using the PREV or NEXT keys and doing the  
following steps.  
1. OBJECT INFO: Press the ENTER key to read the type,  
brightness, size, and quality. Press ENTER again to read the  
coordinates. Press ENTER once more to determine how far  
off the telescope is pointing from the entered object (this is  
displayed in LCD bars, each bar is ten degrees, or if it is on  
the object, no bars). This same information can also be  
accessed at any time by pressing the ENTER key for any  
object entered by the M, STAR, or CNGC keys. Press MODE  
to exit to the main menu file.  
2.  
START FIND: The START FIND option resources the CNGC  
objects within the Object Library and begins a logical search  
starting wherever the telescope is positioned when  
activated. To cover the entire visible sky it will make 31 strip  
divisions about 12° wide, moving from West to East, from the  
North Pole to the South Pole, then South to North. Once it  
has found all of the CNGC objects it will repeat its sequence  
until new objects are visible.  
If you are centered on the object already, such as if you are  
in the FIELD menu selection, or if you have already made a  
GO TO command in one of the other methods for finding an  
object, the above display will be blank.  
To review any of the data of an object, continue to press  
ENTER until the desired field appears. You can use these  
commands at any time that you have an object entered in the  
keypad, while directly entering in specific objects by pressing  
the M, STAR, or CNGC keys, in the START FIND  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
21  
menu selection, the OBJECT INFORMATION menu  
selection, or the FIELD menu selection.  
find objects below your setting.  
Enter the number of degrees above the horizon that  
will clear the obstructions in the sky. To roughly judge  
how many degrees the obstruction is taking up of the  
sky, merely hold your fist at arms length. Each fist  
diameter is approximately 5 degrees. So, if a tree is  
three fists high, you would make a setting of 15 degrees  
in the HIGHER setting. Once the setting is finalized,  
press ENTER.  
4. PARAMETERS: It is here that you can edit the Press ENTER  
to find eight options which can be reviewed by scrolling  
through this menu selection using the PREV or NEXT key.  
To edit an option, move the arrow to the desired option and  
press and hold ENTER until a double beep is heard and a  
blinking cursor appears (except in the BETTER option)  
Where numerical values are to be input, simply type them in  
from the keypad. If you make a mistake, you can move the  
cursor backward using the W key, then re-enter the data. To  
exit to the main option menu, press the ENTER key once  
again. A description of the eight options and how to set them  
is below:  
d.  
LOWER: The LOWER menu file option sets the zenith  
limit setting for the telescope. At power up, the setting is  
90 degrees, which assumes that you point the  
telescope straight up. If, however, you have instruments  
on the telescope which will not clear the fork arms, or if  
you want to avoid the 10° Field De-Rotator limit, this  
setting can be used.  
a. TYPE GPDCO: This menu file option allows you to  
select the type of CNGC objects that you wish to locate.  
GPDCO represent:  
Enter the number of degrees from the zenith that you  
want to limit. Once the setting is finalized, press  
ENTER.  
OBJECT SYMBOL LEGEND  
SYMBOL  
DESCRIPTION  
e.  
LARGER: The LARGER menu file option allows  
settings of the lower apparent size limit of the objects  
you wish to see. At power up it is set to 000' (arc  
minutes). In order to make a decision as to the size  
limits that you may impose, it helps to have a clear  
understanding of exactly what an arc minute of sky is. A  
good example is the apparent size of the Moon, which  
could be expressed as 1/2 of a degree, 30 arc minutes,  
or 1800 arc seconds. Each arc minute is 60 arc  
seconds, and there are 60 arc minutes for each degree  
of sky.  
G
P
D
C
O
GALAXIES  
PLANETARY NEBULAE  
DIFFUSE NEBULAE  
GLOBULAR STAR CLUSTERS  
OPEN STAR CLUSTERS  
Initially, the blinking cursor appears over the G symbol.  
If you decide not to look for galaxies, press NEXT and  
the symbol will change from an upper case letter (G) to  
a lower case letter (g), to deselect the GALAXIES  
category. If you wish to leave GALAXIES selected,  
then move the blinking cursor over to one of the other  
category symbols by pressing the W or E key on the  
keypad. You can then deselect the undesired  
categories.  
Some beginning observers have  
discerning objects less than about 1 arc minute in  
size unless it is double star or planet.  
a
tough time  
a
a
Astrophotographers and those involved with CCD  
imaging may want to set a higher value based on the  
desired image scale coverage that would be most  
impressive with different types of films or  
CCDcameras. Enter the new value in arc minutes,  
then press ENTER to exit to the option file.  
If you wish to recall a category symbol, move the  
blinking cursor over the symbol and press the PREV  
key. After your selections are made, press ENTER.  
b. BETTER: The BETTER menu file option allows you to  
define the visual object quality range. At power up, the  
range is set at the bottom of the scale on VP, when  
using the START FIND menu selection, it will select all  
objects that are very poor through super or what could  
be considered an "ALL" setting. The object quality  
symbols are:  
f.  
SMALLER: This menu option is the upper size object  
limit. At power up the setting is for 200 arc minutes or  
3.33 degrees. This setting is high enough to cover the  
largest objects in the OBJECT LIBRARY. You may want  
to lower the value because of true field-of-view  
limitations of a particular eyepiece (see the RADIUS  
parameter option for calculating true field).  
QUALITY SYMBOL LEGEND  
Other reasons for limiting the value in SMALLER is for  
astrophotographic or CCD imaging requirements where  
we don't want the object to exceed the imaging area of  
the film or the CCD chip.  
SYMBOL  
SU  
DESCRIPTION  
SUPER  
EX  
VG  
G
EXCELLENT  
VERY GOOD  
GOOD  
g.  
BRIGHTER: The lower brightness limits based on  
stellar magnitude can be limited in the BRIGHTER  
menu. At power up, the magnitude value is set to a  
very faint level of +20.0.  
FR  
PR  
VP  
FAIR  
POOR  
You may want to adjust the magnitude level to a  
brighter value starting at perhaps the limiting visual  
magnitude of your LX200, which is approximately 15.5  
for the 16" LX200. If you are taking astrophotographs,  
the limiting magnitude is about 18.0. Sky conditions  
also greatly affect the limiting magnitude due to  
atmospheric haze, high clouds, light pollution, or  
combinations thereof.  
VERY POOR  
If you wish to define the object quality range to Very  
Good and better, press the ENTER key until the symbol  
VG is displayed. From the VP setting to VG requires  
three ENTER key presses. The LX200 will now select  
objects that look Very Good through Super.  
c.  
HIGHER: The Higher menu file option sets the horizon  
setting for the telescope. At power up, the setting is 00  
degrees, which assumes that you have an unobstructed  
line-of-site to the horizon in every direction. If, however,  
there are things obstructing a level horizon, or if the sky  
quality is poor due to haze or light pollution, you can set  
an artificial horizon level so that your LX200 will not try to  
h. FAINTER: The upper level of brightness may also be  
adjusted with the FAINTER menu file option, although  
you may find few applications for limiting it to a lower  
value.  
i.  
RADIUS: The RADIUS value sets the boundaries of  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
22  
your LX200 knows no bounds, any celestial object, including  
comets, asteroids, etc. are easily found, provided you have  
accurate coordinate data to refer to.  
in a given eyepiece while in the FIELD menu. At power  
up the RADIUS menu file option is set to 15 arc minutes,  
the radius of 1/2 a degree (30 arc minutes), which is  
about the proper setting for a 26mm eyepiece used in  
an 8" f/10 LX200.  
To enter  
a
new pointing position in Right Ascension and  
Declination, press the GO TO key and a double beep will be heard  
followed by a blinking cursor that will appear over the RA =  
coordinate numbers. At this point, type in the new Right Ascension  
coordinate numbers, then press the ENTER key. You will then  
notice that the blinking cursor is over the DEC = coordinate  
numbers. Enter the new Declination coordinate numbers, then  
press the ENTER key and the LX200 will slew to the new  
coordinate position.  
To calculate the true field of an eyepiece in the  
telescope, first divide the focal length of the telescope  
(e.g., 2000mm for an 8" f/10) by the focal length of the  
eyepiece (the standard supplied eyepiece is a 26mm  
Super Plossl, 2000 divided by 26 equals 77X  
magnification). Then find the apparent field of the  
eyepiece (which is 52 degrees for the 26mm Super  
Plossl) and divide it by the magnification (52 divided by  
77 equals 0.67 degrees, multiplied by 60 equals 40.2  
arc minutes).  
You can also slew to ALTAZ coordinates from the ALTAZ display  
as described above.  
If you need to enter a minus Declination setting, move the blinking  
cursor over the + symbol with the W key and then press the NEXT  
key to get the - (minus) symbol, then move the blinking cursor to  
the first number with the E key and enter the new coordinate  
numbers. If you are already at a minus (-) Declination setting and  
wish to enter a plus (+) declination setting, follow the same  
instructions as above but press the PREV key instead to get the +  
symbol.  
To get the radius of the true field of view, divide the true  
field by 2. In the case of the above equation, 40.2 arc  
minutes divided by 2 equals 20.1 arc minutes.  
2. Mode Two: COORDINATES/GO TO  
Mode Two allows you to see where you have pointed the LX200 in  
two celestial coordinate formats, either R.A. and Dec. or  
Altazimuth. Also in this mode you can enter new Right Ascension  
and Declination coordinates for any sky position, perhaps to locate  
objects not in the LX200 library such as comets or asteroids and  
have your telescope slew to the new coordinates.  
3. Mode Three: CLOCK/CALENDAR  
The continuously operating clock and calendar is the life pulse of  
your LX200. At power up, the telescope's sidereal clock  
automatically allows the system computer to make orbital  
calculations of the planets, and correct stellar precession for  
superior pointing ability.  
a. Coordinates Menu File  
You will at first see the RA = and DEC = coordinates of where the  
telescope is pointing. If you move the LX200 with the N, S, W, or E  
keys, the coordinates display will immediately update the new  
position in Right Ascension and Declination.  
Your accurate initial input of local time and date, with its long-life  
lithium battery back-up, need not be re-entered every time you  
use the LX200, thus enhancing the user friendly aspects of the  
instrument.  
You can also display computed information of the Altazimuth  
coordinates (ALT = and A2 =) by pressing the ENTER key. To  
return to RA = and DEC =, press the ENTER key again.  
To set the local time and date and to enter the correct GMT offset  
(see QUICK START, page 9). Be sure to use your local hour setting  
appropriately in either 12 hour or 24 hour format as  
predetermined by the 12/24 HOUR TELESCOPE menu file option.  
The RA = display is broken down into hours, minutes, and tenths  
of a minute, and the DEC = display is broken down into + for North  
Declination and - for South Declination into degrees and minutes as  
shown in Display 32:  
The long-life lithium battery (Panasonic CR2032 3 vDC or Duracell  
DL2032B) is stored behind the power panel of the Drive Base (see  
Behind the Power Panel, page 53 for battery replacement  
information).  
If you have made an ALTAZ style of alignment, the ALT = and AZ =  
coordinate display is formatted so that 0 degrees azimuth (AZ =) is  
due South that increases to up to 359 degrees and 59 minutes  
moving clockwise, or from due South moving Westerly, altitude  
(ALT =) is formatted so that straight overhead is +90 degrees and  
00 minutes, decreasing to +00 degrees, and 00 minutes as you  
move the telescope level with the horizon, and then as the LX200  
moves below +00.00 it will give minus altitude readings. The  
Altazimuth coordinate display is shown in Display 33:  
4. Mode Four: TIMER/FREQ  
a. TIMER = Menu Option  
The TIMER = menu option is for accurately timing different  
observing or imaging tasks for up to 12 hours long. Counting down  
to zero, in the hours, minutes, and seconds format, it will give a  
pleasant beeping tone to notify you that the time is up. To set the  
TIMER, move the arrow to TIMER = 00:00:00. Then press and  
hold the ENTER key to get the double beep tone and the blinking  
cursor. Enter the number of hours, minutes, and seconds that you  
require. If you need to correct an error in entry, use the E and W  
keys to move the blinking cursor and then type in the correct  
information. After entry, press the ENTER key again and the  
cursor will delete. When you are ready to start your time count-  
down, press the ENTER key once more. To pause the count-down  
press ENTER again, and then again to resume.  
While in ALTAZ, you will find during slewing in one direction, that  
both the RA = and DEC = display will change at the same time,  
while the ALT = and the AZ = display will only change in the  
direction that the telescope is being slewed. It is also important to  
note that only the Declination setting circle (3, Fig. 1) will give a  
correct reading. The R.A. setting circle (10, Fig. 1) will only give  
correct readings in the POLAR setting (see APPENDIX B, page 29).  
If you want an automatic 12 hour countdown, press the ENTER  
key without holding. Then press ENTER to countdown.  
b. FREQ = Menu File  
FREQ = (Frequency) allows you to adjust the tracking speed (not  
slew speed) of the LX200 digitally in tenths of a hertz from 56.4 Hz  
to 60.1 Hz, so that you can match virtually every celestial motion  
in the sky. Some popular drive rate settings are:  
b. GO TO Menu Option  
The GO TO menu option, allows you to enter new Right  
Ascension and Declination coordinates of any object in the sky, so  
that the LX200 will slew to the new position. With this ability,  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 3  
FREQ RATE  
60.1 Hz Q  
DESCRIPTION  
NOTES  
Sidereal rate;  
Quartz setting  
Default rate at power up.  
Gives sidereal frequency  
accuracy to ±.005%; Best  
for astrophotos  
60.0 Hz  
57.9 Hz  
Average rate for tracking  
planets; Actual rates vary  
due to retrogrades,  
Solar and  
planetary rate  
oppositions, etc.  
Lunar rate  
Best rate for tracking the  
Moon  
There are three menu file options in FREQ =. To see or set the  
options, move the arrow to FREQ = and press ENTER. At power  
up, the FREQ = default is the 60.1 Hz Q setting. The quartz rate is  
precisely fixed and cannot be altered. To choose a different rate,  
press the ENTER key to see 60.1 M and then again to see 60.1 M  
with the up and down arrow. These two menu file options can  
adjust the tracking speeds. The adjustment techniques are  
described below:  
Display 34 shows the manual rate menu file option that can be  
adjusted by pressing and holding the ENTER key to get the double  
beep tone and the blinking cursor. Type in the new rate, then  
when finished, press the ENTER key again.  
Display 35 shows the menu file option that allows you to step the  
drive tracking frequency setting in tenths of a hertz, by using the  
PREV and NEXT (up and down arrow) keys. This is a convenient  
feature if you are trying to match the precise speed of a planet,  
comet, or any other non-stellar object. To exit this option, press  
the MODE key.  
5. Mode Five: KEYPAD OFF/BRIGHTNESS ADJUST  
In order to see very faint objects, it will sometimes be necessary  
to either dim or completely turn off the keypad red LCD  
backlighting. To do so press the MODE button until the display  
goes blank. This is the OFF option.  
To set the keypad brightness, press the ENTER button and adjust  
the brightness to your satisfaction with the PREV and NEXT keys.  
To exit, press the MODE key.  
This brightness setting also dims the power panel power LED and  
Ammeter.  
NOTE: The backlighting is done by edge lighting a plastic light  
bar underneath the keypad. Four LEDs are used and do not  
give a perfectly even backlighting of the keys as keys closer to a  
LED will be a little brighter than those keys further away.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 4  
MAGNIFICATION AND FIELD OF VIEW  
1. Magnification  
bright, clearly resolved but smaller image will show far more detail  
than a dimmer, poorly resolved larger image.  
Because of certain characteristics of the human eye (in particular,  
eye pupil diameter) and because of optical considerations  
inherent in the design of a telescope, there exists minimum  
practical powers. Generally speaking, the lowest usable power is  
approximately 4X per inch of telescope aperture, or about 28X in  
the case of the 7" telescope. During the daytime, when human  
eye pupil diameter is reduced, the minimum practical power with  
the 8" LX200 is increased to about 60X, to about 75X with the 10"  
LX200, and to about 90X with the 12" LX200; powers lower than  
this level should be avoided during daytime observations. A  
reasonable magnification range for daytime terrestrial  
observations through the 7" LX200 is from about 70X to 180X, 8"  
LX200 is from about 80X to 190X, through the 10" LX200 from  
about 100X to 200X, and the 12" LX200 from 120X to 240X. It  
should be noted, however, that the higher magnifications may not  
be used due to atmospheric distortion caused by heat, moisture,  
and paniculate matter suspended in the air. Accessories are  
available both to increase and decrease the operating eyepiece  
power of the telescope. See your Meade dealer and the latest  
Meade Catalog for information on accessories.  
The magnification (power) of the telescope depends on two  
characteristics: the focal length of the main telescope and the  
focal length of the eyepiece used during a particular observation.  
For example, the focal length of the LX200 7" f/15 telescope is  
fixed at 2670mm; the focal length of the 8" f/10 telescope is fixed  
at 2000mm; the focal length of the 10" f/10 telescope is fixed at  
2500mm; and the focal length of the 12" f/10 telescope is fixed at  
3048mm. To calculate the power in use with a particular eyepiece,  
divide the focal length of the eyepiece into the focal length of the  
main telescope.  
Example: The power obtained with the 8" LX200 with the SP  
26mm eyepiece is:  
The type of eyepiece (whether MA "Modified Achromatic," PL  
"Plossl," SP "Super Plossl," etc.) has no bearing on magnifying  
power but does affect such optical characteristics as field of view,  
flatness of field and color correction.  
2. Apparent Field and Actual Field  
Two terms that are often confused and misunderstood are  
"Apparent Field" and "Actual Field." "Apparent Field" is a function  
of the eyepiece design and is built into the eyepiece. While not  
totally accurate (but a very good approximation), "Apparent Field"  
is usually thought of as the angle your eye sees when looking  
through an eyepiece. "Actual Field" is the amount of the sky that  
you actually see and is a function of the eyepiece being used and  
the telescope.  
The maximum practical magnification is determined by the nature  
of the object being observed and, most importantly, by the  
prevailing atmospheric conditions. Under very steady atmospheric  
"seeing," the 7" LX200 may be used at powers up to about 450X  
on astronomical objects, the 8" LX200 may be used at powers up  
to about 500X, the 10" LX200 up to about 600X, and the 12"  
LX200 up to about 750X. Generally, however, lower powers of  
perhaps 250X to 350X will be the maximum permissible,  
consistent with high image resolution. When unsteady air  
conditions prevail (as witnessed by rapid "twinkling" of the stars),  
extremely high-power eyepieces result in "empty magnification,"  
where the object detail observed is actually diminished by the  
excessive power.  
The "Actual Field" of  
a
telescope with  
a
given eyepiece is  
calculated by dividing the "Apparent Field" of the eyepiece by the  
power obtained using that eyepiece.  
The table below lists the most common eyepieces available and  
the "Apparent Field" for each. The power and "Actual Field" of  
view that each eyepiece yields is listed for each basic telescope  
optical design.  
When beginning observations on a particular object, start with a  
low power eyepiece; get the object well-centered in the field of  
view and sharply focused; then try the next step up in  
magnification. If the image starts to become fuzzy as you work into  
higher magnifications, then back down to a lower power — the  
atmospheric steadiness is not sufficient to support high powers at  
the time you are observing. Keep in mind that a  
7" f/15  
Eyepiece/Apparent Field  
8"f/6.3  
Power/Actual Field  
10"f/6.3  
Power/Actual Field  
8" f/10  
Power/Actual Field  
10" f/10  
Power/Actual Field  
12" f/10  
Power/Actual Field  
Power/Actual Field  
Super Plossl Eyepieces (5-elements  
; 1.25" O.D., except as noted)  
6.4mm/52°  
9.7mm/52°  
12.4mm/52°  
15mm/52°  
417/0.12°  
275/0.19°  
215/0.24°  
178/0.29°  
134/0.39°  
103/0.50°  
83/0.63°  
67/0.66°  
48/1 .08°  
200/0.26°  
132/0.39°  
103/0.50°  
85/0.61°  
64/0.81°  
49/1 .06°  
40/1 .30°  
32/1 .69°  
23/2.27°  
250/0.21° 313/0.17°  
391/0.13°  
258/0.20°  
202/0.26°  
167/0.31°  
125/0.42°  
96/0.54°  
78/0.67°  
63/0.70°  
45/1.16°  
476/0.11°  
314/0.17°  
246/0.21°  
203/0.26°  
152/0.34°  
117/0.44°  
95/0.55°  
76/0.53°  
54/1 .04°  
165/0.32° 206/0.25°  
129/0.40° 161/0.32°  
107/0.49° 133/0.39°  
80/0.65° 100/0.52°  
62/0.84° 77/0.68°  
20mm/52°  
26mm/52°  
32mm/52°  
50/1 .04°  
40/1 .35°  
29/1 .82°  
63/0.83°  
50/0.88°  
36/1 .46°  
40mm/44°  
56mm/52° (2" O.D.)  
Eyepieces (6-elements; 1.25" O.D  
Super Wide Angle  
13.8mm/67°  
., except as noted)  
193/0.35°  
148/0.45°  
109/0.61°  
83/0.81°  
93/0.72°  
71/0.94°  
52/1 .28°  
40/1 .67°  
116/0.58° 145/0.46°  
181/0.37°  
139/0.48°  
102/0.66°  
78/0.86°  
221/0.30°  
169/0.40°  
124/0.54°  
95/0.71°  
1 8mm/67°  
89/0.75°  
65/103°  
50/1 .34°  
111/0.60°  
82/0.82°  
63/1 .07°  
24.5mm/67°  
32mm/67° (2" O.D.)  
40mm/67° (2" O.D.)  
67/1 .00°  
32/2.09°  
40/1 .67°  
50/1 .34°  
63/1 .07°  
76/0.88°  
Ultra Wide Angle Eyepieces (8-elements; 1.25" O.D.,  
except as noted)  
4.7mm/84°  
568/0.15°  
399/0.21°  
272/0.31°  
191/0.44°  
145/0.58°  
340/0.25° 426/0.20°  
239/0.35° 299/0.28°  
182/0.46° 227/0.37°  
532/0.16°  
373/0.23°  
284/0.30°  
649/0.13°  
455/0.18°  
346/0.24°  
6.7mm/84°  
8.8mm/84° (1.25" -2'  
O.D.) 303/0.28°  
14mm/84° (1.25" -2"  
O.D.) 199/0.44° 91/0.92°  
114/0.73° 143/0.59°  
1 79/0.47°  
218/0.39°  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 5  
APPENDIX A: EQUATORIAL WEDGE  
There are two equatorial wedges used on Meade LX200  
telescopes. Please read the section, below, that applies to your  
telescope.  
1. 8" Equatorial Wedge (For 7" and 8" LX200)  
The equatorial wedge permits use of the 8" LX200 telescope in an  
astronomical, or "equatorial," mode. The wedge fits onto the field  
tripod, described below, and accepts the base of the 7" or 8"  
LX200 fork mount (Fig. 8).  
NOTE: The Meade equatorial wedge is designed solely for use in  
conjunction with the Meade field tripod. The wedge should  
never be used without the field tripod (e.g., by placing the  
wedge alone on a table top and then mounting the telescope on  
the wedge). The 7" or 8" LX200, placed onto the equatorial  
wedge alone without the field tripod attached to the wedge may  
become seriously imbalanced, to the point where the telescope  
may actually tip over.  
a. Azimuth Control  
The azimuth control(Fig. 9) for the Meade equatorial wedge and  
field tripod is shipped in a plastic bag and includes the following  
parts:  
Azimuth base (large U shaped piece of aluminum)  
Azimuth arm (small T shaped piece of aluminum)  
2 - Azimuth knobs  
2 - 8-32 x 1/2" flat-head machine screws  
2 - 8-32 x 1" round-head machine screws  
To attach the azimuth control to your wedge and tripod, follow  
these steps:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Remove the 4 set screws from the wedge and field tripod  
(which plug the attachment holes) using a screwdriver.  
Attach the azimuth arm to the equatorial wedge using the 2  
ea. 8-32 x 1/2" flat-head machine screws.  
Attach the azimuth base to the field tripod using the 2 ea. 8-32  
x 1" round-head machine screws.  
Thread the two azimuth adjustment knobs into the azimuth  
base, until they just touch the azimuth arm.  
The azimuth control is now ready to use. To adjust in azimuth,  
loosen the 3" central wedge knob. Rotate the wedge by using the  
two azimuth knobs in a push-pull manner. After positioning the  
wedge, tighten the central wedge knob.  
The equatorial wedge for the 7" and 8" LX200 telescope is of  
modern design, with several important features incorporated to  
simplify and facilitate telescope operation. After using the wedge,  
you will find that the functional design features included are of very  
significant value in routine telescope operations. Features included  
are:  
b. Deluxe Latitude Adjuster  
The deluxe latitude adjuster (DLA) attaches directly to the  
equatorial wedge and permits very precise adjustments in latitude  
angle by the simple turning of one knob.  
Attachment of the wedge to the field tripod by means of only  
one manual knob.  
The equatorial wedge for Meade 7" or 8" Schmidt-Cassegrain  
telescope is shipped with the main crossbar of the DLA already  
installed. Loosen the two socket-head screws that lock the main  
crossbar in place, to allow the crossbar to rotate slightly if needed.  
Thread the long adjustment knob (3, Fig. 14) into the main  
crossbar and position the end of the adjustment knob into the  
cavity on the underside of the equatorial wedge tilt-plate. Tighten  
the two socket-head screws locking the main crossbar into place.  
Quick azimuth adjustment by loosening the manual knob as  
described above.  
Bubble level for rapid tripod/wedge leveling.  
Etched latitude scale for fast adjustment of the latitude angle.  
To assemble the equatorial wedge, follow this procedure (note  
that all required wedge hardware and manual knobs are shipped  
within the wedge carton);  
The DLA is now ready to use. To make fine latitude adjustments,  
follow this procedure:  
a.  
The wedge consists of two basic parts: the tilt plate and  
wedge body (1 and 4, Fig. 8). Attach the tilt-plate to the  
wedge body by threading in the four knobs provided. Two  
knobs, with washers, should be used on each side of the  
wedge body so that a total of 4 knobs attach the tilt plate to  
the wedge body.  
1.  
2.  
Slightly loosen the knobs (5, Fig. 8), on each side of the wedge.  
Turn the DLA's adjustment knob (pressing against the  
bottom of the tilt-plate), so that the tilt-plate moves in latitude  
angle.  
b.  
Place the wedge onto the field tripod with the central threaded  
rod of the tripod fitting through the center hole in the floor of  
the wedge. Thread the 2-1/2" diameter manual knob onto the  
threaded rod of the tripod and firmly tighten the manual knob.  
3.  
Re-tighten the two knobs, which were loosened in step 1,  
above.  
NOTE: When installing the tilt-plate to the wedge, note that it is a  
tight fit and the sides must generally spread slightly to accept  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
26  
the tilt-plate. If the main crossbar of the DLA is already  
tightened into place this will inhibit your installation of the tilt-  
plate. You will therefore see that by re/easing the screws on the  
ends of the DLA crossbar your installation of the wedge tilt-  
plate will be facilitated.  
Holding the threaded rod in position, place the  
Superwedge on top of the tripod head so that the threaded  
stud extending from the tripod head passes through the  
center hole on the wedge floor. Make sure the pin extending  
from the bottom of the azimuth thrust bar is positioned in the  
slot on the tangent arm (see Fig. 11 a., above).  
2. SUPERWEDGE (For 10" and 12"LX200)  
The Superwedge permits use of the 10" and 12" LX200 telescope  
in an astronomical, or "equatorial," mode. The wedge fits onto the  
field tripod, described below, and accepts the base of the 10" and  
12" LX200 fork mount (Fig. 10).  
Install the large hand knob/compass onto the threaded stud.  
Pass the three 5M6-18 X 1-1/4" button head screws through  
the clearance slots on the wedge floor and thread them into  
the tripod head.  
The lower tilt plate locking screws (3, Fig. 11) are installed in  
the factory to allow the tilt plate to be adjusted for any latitude  
greater than 25 degrees and less than 55 degrees. If viewing  
in a region with a latitude greater than 55 degrees, move the  
locking bolts to the lower mounting holes (4, Fig. 11).  
NOTE: The Meade Superwedge is designed solely for use in  
conjunction with the Meade field tripod. The Superwedge  
should never be used without the field tripod (e.g., by placing  
the Superwedge alone on a table top and then mounting the  
telescope on the wedge). The 10" and 12" LX200, placed onto  
the Superwedge alone without the field tripod attached to the  
wedge may become seriously imbalanced, to the point where  
the telescope may actually tip over.  
3. Mounting the Telescope On the Wedge  
With 7" or 8" LX200 telescopes, three knobs are supplied for  
mounting the telescope's drive base to the tilt-plate of the  
equatorial wedge. With the 10" and 12" LX200, three socket  
screws are provided for this purpose.  
The Superwedge for the 10" and 12" LX200 telescope is of  
modern design, with several important features incorporated to  
simplify and facilitate telescope operation. After using the  
Superwedge for your telescope, you will find that the functional  
design features included are of very significant value in routine  
telescope operations. Some of these features include:  
Attachment of the Superwedge to the field tripod by means of  
only one manual knob. (For photographic applications with  
the telescope where extreme steadiness is required, 3  
additional hex-head screws are provided).  
Quick azimuth adjustment by loosening the manual knob as  
described above.  
Bubble level for rapid tripod/wedge leveling.  
Etched latitude scale for fast adjustment of the latitude angle.  
Built-in latitude adjustment control.  
To assemble the Superwedge, follow this procedure (note that all  
required wedge hardware and manual knobs are shipped within  
the wedge carton):  
a.  
Locate the two 8-32 nylon set screws on the rim of the tripod  
head and remove them. Attach the tangent arm to the tripod  
using the supplied 8-32 X 1/2" socket cap screws. (See Fig.  
11 a., below.)  
b.  
Push the field tripod threaded rod up so that the threaded rod  
extends above the top of the tripod head.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 7  
4. Magnetic Compass  
The magnetic compass helps the observer to set-up the telescope  
without actually seeing the pole star Polaris. This allows setting up  
before dark or in locations where the view of Polaris is  
obstructed. The magnetic compass has an adjustment to  
compensate for the local angle of Magnetic Declination. Note:  
Magnetic Declination is the difference between Magnetic North  
(which the compass shows) and true north (where the telescope  
should be pointed). Magnetic Declination should not be confused  
with the astronomical term "Declination," which, when used with  
"Right Ascension", describes the celestial coordinate system.  
a. Setting Magnetic Declination  
In order to obtain an accurate reading using the compass, you  
must first adjust for the Magnetic Declination for your location.  
1. First, determine the Magnetic Declination in your area using the  
Isogonic Chart (Fig. 15)  
2.  
Squeeze the clear central vial with thumb and index finger of  
the left hand.  
3.  
With the right hand, rotate the outer dial until the orienting  
arrow (the black arrow painted on the inside clear surface) is  
lined up with the desired Magnetic Declination angle on the  
declination scale. Notice that East Magnetic Declination is  
to the right of the "North" position and West Magnetic  
Declination is left. As an example, Fig. 16 shows the correct  
setting for 16 degrees West Declination, which covers  
Providence, Rhode Island.  
Thread one of these knobs (or screws, as appropriate) partially  
into the hole on the underside of the drive base, located at the  
curved-end of the drive base (4, Fig. 12). This knob or screw  
should be threaded in about 3 full turns, not fully threaded into the  
hole.  
Check that the knobs or bolts at the side of the wedge (5, Fig. 8 or  
5, Fig. 10), are firmly tightened before placing the telescope onto  
the wedge.  
Grasping the 2 fork arms of the telescope firmly, with the power  
panel towards you, place the telescope onto the tilt plate of the  
wedge by sliding the knob (7" and 8" LX200) or screw (10" and 12"  
LX200) into the slot at the top of the curved-end of the wedge tilt-  
plate.  
b. Compass Installation  
The Magnetic Compass is now set for the correct declination angle.  
To attach to the equatorial wedge, follow these steps:  
1. Snap the Magnetic Compass into the 3" diameter wedge  
attachment knob (after setting the Magnetic Declination as  
described above). Position the compass into the knob so that  
the 360 degree location on the direction scale (the "North"  
position) lines up with one of the nine points of the knobs.  
(See Fig. 16.) Press the compass firmly into the knob.  
Insert the 2 remaining knobs for the 7" and 8" LX200, or socket  
screws for the 10" and 12" LX200, through the underside of the tilt  
plate and into the underside of the drive base. Tighten down all 3  
knobs or screws to a firm feel. Extreme force is not necessary in  
this regard.  
The telescope is now fully mounted onto the wedge and field  
tripod. Adjustments in wedge latitude angle and/or azimuth  
orientation may be made with the telescope in place. Further  
details on telescope polar alignment see APPENDIX B, page 30.  
2.  
Assemble the equatorial wedge onto the field tripod as  
described in the Instruction Manual using the  
knob/compass combination to attach the wedge to the  
tripod.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
28  
Rotate the knob/compass so that the magnetic pointing arrow  
lies directly over the painted black alignment arrow (painted  
on the bottom surface of the compass, Fig. 18). The "North"  
position on the direction scale (and the point on the  
c. Finding True North  
The Magnetic Compass is now ready to use. Just follow these  
simple steps for a quick and easy azimuth alignment:  
1. Loosen the knob/compass slightly. This allows for rotation of  
the equatorial wedge under the knob/compass (Fig. 17).  
The magnetic pointing arrow will point to magnetic north.  
knob/compass) now point directly north.  
3.  
Rotate the equatorial wedge in azimuth (without moving the  
knob/compass) until the centerline of the wedge lines up with  
the point of the knob/compass (Fig. 19). The centerline of the  
equatorial wedge now falls directly on the true north line.  
4. Tighten the knob/compass, locking the equatorial wedge into  
place.  
The field tripod and equatorial wedge are now pointed directly  
toward celestial north, without ever having seen the North Star.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 9  
APPENDIX B: EQUATORIAL USE  
1. Celestial Coordinates  
effect, to read the object coordinates and the object found without  
resorting to visual location techniques. However, these setting  
circles may be used to advantage only if the telescope is first  
properly aligned with the North Celestial Pole.  
Celestial objects are mapped according to a coordinate system on  
the Celestial Sphere, an imaginary sphere surrounding Earth on  
which all stars appear to be placed. This celestial object mapping  
system is analogous to the Earth-based coordinate system of  
latitude and longitude. The poles of the celestial coordinate  
system are defined as those two points where the Earth's  
rotational axis, if extended to infinity, north and south, intersect the  
celestial sphere. Thus, the North Celestial Pole (1, Fig. 20) is that  
point in the sky where an extension of the Earth's axis through the  
North Pole intersects the celestial sphere. This point in the sky is  
located near the North Star, Polaris.  
2. Lining Up with the Celestial Pole  
Objects in the sky appear to revolve around the celestial pole.  
(Actually, celestial objects are essentially "fixed," and their  
apparent motion is caused by the Earth's axial rotation). During  
any 24 hour period, stars make one complete revolution about the  
pole, making concentric circles with the pole at the center. By lining  
up the telescope's polar axis with the North Celestial Pole (or for  
observers located in Earth's Southern Hemisphere with the South  
Celestial Pole (see MODE FUNCTIONS, page 16) astronomical  
objects may be followed, or tracked, simply by moving the  
telescope about one axis, the polar axis. In the case of the Meade  
LX200 7", 8", 10", and 12" Schmidt-Cassegrain telescopes, this  
tracking may be accomplished automatically with the electric  
motor drive.  
In mapping the surface of the Earth, lines of longitude are drawn  
between the North and South Poles. Similarly, lines of latitude are  
drawn in an east-west direction, parallel to the Earth's Equator.  
The Celestial Equator (2, Fig. 20) is a projection of the Earth's  
Equator onto the celestial sphere.  
If the telescope is reasonably well aligned with the pole, therefore,  
very little use of the telescope's Declination slow motion control is  
necessary—virtually all of the required telescope tracking will be  
in Right Ascension. (If the telescope were perfectly aligned with  
the pole, no Declination tracking of stellar objects would be  
required). For the purposes of casual visual telescopic  
observations, lining up the telescope's polar axis to within a  
degree or two of the pole is more than sufficient: with this level of  
pointing accuracy, the telescope's motor drive will track accurately  
and keep objects in the telescopic field of view for perhaps 20 to  
30 minutes.  
Just as on the surface of the Earth, in mapping the celestial  
sphere, imaginary lines have been drawn to form a coordinate  
grid. Thus, object positions on the Earth's surface are specified by  
their latitude and longitude. For example, you could locate Los  
Angeles, California, by its latitude (+34°) and longitude (118°);  
similarly, you could locate the constellation Ursa Major (which  
includes the Big Dipper) by its general position on the celestial  
sphere:  
R.A.: 11 hr; Dec: +50°.  
Right Ascension: The celestial analog to Earth longitude is  
called "Right Ascension," or "R.A.," and is measured in time  
on the 24 hour "clock" and shown in hours ("hr"), minutes  
("min") and seconds ("sec") from an arbitrarily defined "zero"  
line of Right Ascension passing through the constellation  
Pegasus. Right Ascension coordinates range from Ohr Omin  
Osec to 23hr 59min 59sec. Thus there are 24 primary lines of  
R.A., located at 15 degree intervals along the celestial  
equator. Objects located further and further east of the prime  
Right Ascension grid line (Ohr Omin Osec) carry increasing  
R.A. coordinates.  
Begin polar aligning the telescope as soon as you can see Polaris.  
Finding Polaris is simple. Most people recognize the "Big Dipper."  
The Big Dipper has two stars that point the way to Polaris (see  
Fig. 21). Once Polaris is found, it is a straightforward procedure  
to obtain a rough polar alignment.  
Declination: The celestial analog to Earth latitude is called  
Declination, or "Dec", and is measured in degrees, minutes  
and seconds (e.g., 15° 27' 33"). Declination shown as north  
of the celestial equator is indicated with a "+" sign in front of  
the measurement (e.g., the Declination of the North Celestial  
Pole is +90°), with Declination south of the celestial equator  
indicated with a "-" sign (e.g., the Declination of the South  
Celestial Pole is -90°). Any point on the celestial equator itself  
(which, for example, passes through the constellations Orion,  
Virgo and Aquarius) is specified as having a Dec of zero,  
shown as 0° 0' 0".  
To line up the 7", 8", 10" or 12" LX200 with the Pole, follow this  
procedure:  
a.  
Using the bubble level located on the floor of the wedge,  
adjust the tripod legs so that the telescope/ wedge/tripod  
system reads "level."  
With all celestial objects therefore capable of being specified in  
position by their celestial coordinates of Right Ascension and  
Declination, the task of finding objects (in particular, faint objects)  
is vastly simplified. The setting circles, R.A (10, Fig. 1) and Dec.  
(3, Fig. 1) of the LX200 telescope may be dialed, in  
b.  
c.  
Set the equatorial wedge to your observing latitude as  
described in Appendix A.  
Loosen the Dec. lock, and rotate the telescope tube in  
Declination so that the telescope's Declination reads 90°.  
Tighten the Dec. lock. Loosen the R.A. lock, and rotate the  
Fork Arms to the 00 H.A. position (see MODE FUNCTIONS,  
page 16) and initiate the POLAR align sequence on the  
keypad.  
d.  
Using the azimuth and latitude controls on the wedge, center  
Polaris in the field of view. Do not use the telescope's  
Declination or Right Ascension controls during this process.  
At this point, your polar alignment is good enough for casual  
observations. There are times, however, when you will need to  
have precise polar alignment, such as when making fine  
astrophotographs or when using the setting circles to find new  
objects.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 0  
should be located within ±30 minutes in R.A. of the meridian and  
within ±5° of the celestial equator. (Pointing the telescope at  
a star that is straight up, with the Declination set to 0°, will  
point the telescope in the right direction.)  
As an aside procedure, during your first use of the telescope, you  
should check the calibration of the Declination setting circle (3,  
Fig. 1), located at the top of each side of the fork. After  
performing the polar alignment procedure, center the star  
Polaris in the telescope field. Remove the knurled central hub of  
the Declination setting circle and slightly loosen the two bolts  
located under the knob. Now turn the circle unit until it reads  
89.2°, the Declination of Polaris, and then tighten down the two  
bolts and replace the knurled knob. Also realize, should you wish  
to use the manual setting circles, that the R.A. setting circle (10,  
Fig. 1) must be calibrated on the Right Ascension of a star (see  
APPENDIX C, page 31) manually every time the telescope is set  
up. The R.A. setting circle has two sets of numbers, the inner set  
is for Southern hemisphere use, while the other is for Northern  
hemisphere use.  
c.  
Note the extent of the star's drift in Declination (disregard  
drift in Right Ascension):  
a. If the star drifts South (or down), the telescope's polar  
axis is pointing too far East (Fig. 22).  
b. If the star drifts North (or up), the telescope's polar axis is  
pointing too far West (Fig. 23).  
d.  
Move the wedge in azimuth (horizontally) to effect the  
appropriate change in polar alignment. Reposition the  
telescope's East-West polar axis orientation until there is no  
further North-South drift by the star. Track the star for  
a
period of time to be certain that its Declination drift has  
ceased. (Please note that Figs. 22, 23, 24, and 25 show the  
telescope pointed in the 90 degree position, and not the 0  
degree position that is required for "Drift" method alignment.  
This is done to illustrate the position of the pole star relative  
to the polar axis of the telescope.)  
Once the latitude angle of the wedge has been fixed and locked-in  
according to the above procedure, it is not necessary to repeat this  
operation each time the telescope is used, unless you move a  
considerable distance North or South from your original observing  
position. (Approximately 70 miles movement in North-South  
observing position is equivalent to 1° in latitude change). The  
wedge may be detached from the field tripod and, as long as the  
latitude angle setting is not altered and the field tripod is leveled, it  
will retain the correct latitude setting when replaced on the tripod.  
e.  
f.  
Next, point the telescope at another moderately bright star  
near the Eastern horizon, but still near the celestial equator.  
For best results, the star should be about 20° or 30° above  
the Eastern horizon and within ± 5° of the celestial equator.  
3. Precise Polar Alignment  
Again note the extent of the star's drift in Declination:  
It should be emphasized that precise alignment of the  
telescope's polar axis to the celestial pole for casual visual  
observations is not necessary. Don't allow a time-consuming  
effort at lining up with the pole to interfere with your basic  
enjoyment of the telescope. For long-exposure photography,  
however, the ground rules are quite different, and precise polar  
alignment is not only advisable, but almost essential.  
a. If the star drifts South, (or down) the telescope's polar  
axis is pointing too low (Fig. 24).  
b. If the star drifts North, (or up) the telescope's polar axis  
is pointing too high (Fig. 25).  
g.  
Use the latitude angle fine-adjust control on the wedge to  
effect the appropriate change in latitude angle, based on  
your observations above. Again, track the star for a period of  
time to be certain that Declination drift has ceased.  
Notwithstanding the precision and sophistication of the drive  
system supplied with the Meade LX200 telescopes, the fewer  
tracking corrections required during the course of a long-exposure  
photograph, the better. (For our purposes, "long-exposure" means  
any photograph of about 10 minutes duration or longer). In  
particular, the number of Declination corrections required is a  
direct function of the precision of polar alignment.  
The above procedure results in very accurate polar alignment,  
and minimizes the need for tracking corrections during  
astrophotography.  
Precise polar alignment requires the use of a crosshair eyepiece.  
The Meade Illuminated Reticle Eyepiece is well-suited in this  
application, but you will want to increase the effective  
magnification through the use of a 2X or 3X Barlow lens. Then  
either follow Refined Polar Alignment (page 17) or follow this  
procedure, sometimes better known as the "Drift" method  
(particularly if the pole star is not visible):  
a.  
Obtain a rough polar alignment as described earlier. Place  
the illuminated reticle eyepiece (or eyepiece/Barlow  
combination) into the eyepiece holder of the telescope.  
b. Point the telescope, with the motor drive running, at a  
moderately bright star near where the meridian (the North-  
South line passing through your local zenith) and the celestial  
equator intersect. For best results, the star  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
31  
APPENDIX C: LX200  
ALIGNMENTSTAR LIBRARY  
AND STAR CHARTS:  
1. Alignment Stars  
The LX200 utilizes 33 bright and well known stars to calibrate the  
telescope's Object Library in the ALTAZ and POLAR alignments.  
These stars were selected to allow observers from anywhere in  
the world on any given night, to be able to easily and quickly make  
precision alignments. The LX200 Alignment Star Library and Star  
Charts are below for your reference:  
LX200 ALIGNMENT STAR LIBRARY  
MAGNITUDE  
0.5  
CONSTELL  
R/A  
DEC.  
STAR NAME  
ACHERNAR  
STAR*  
13  
-57 14  
ERIDANUS  
01 37.7  
ACRUXA  
ALBIREO  
ALKAID  
121  
223  
140  
33  
1.3  
3.1  
1.9  
0.9  
1.7  
2.0  
2.2  
0.8  
0.9  
0.0  
0.4  
2.6  
-0.7  
0.1  
1.9  
1.3  
2.1  
2.0  
2.4  
1.2  
0.6  
2.0  
2.5  
2.1  
2.0  
1.1  
0.4  
1.4  
0.1  
-1.5  
1.0  
0.0  
CRUX  
1226.6  
1930.8  
1347.6  
04 35.9  
05 36.2  
09 27.6  
1535.5  
1950.8  
1629.5  
14 15.7  
05 55.2  
05 59.8  
06 24.0  
05 16.6  
07 34.6  
2041.5  
11 49.1  
00 43.6  
21 44.2  
22 57.7  
1403.9  
02 07.2  
23 04.8  
02 19.4  
02 14.7  
07 45.4  
07 39.3  
1008.5  
05 14.6  
06 45.2  
1325.2  
1837.0  
-6306  
+2758  
+49 19  
+1631  
-01 12  
-0839  
+2643  
+0852  
-2626  
+19 11  
+0725  
+3713  
-5242  
+4600  
+31 53  
CYGNUS  
URSA MAJOR  
TAURUS  
ORION  
ALDEBARAN  
ALNILAM  
ALPHARD  
ALPHEKKA  
ALTAI R  
50  
95  
HYDRA  
165  
226  
177  
147  
56  
CORONA BOR.  
AQUILA  
SCORPIUS  
BOOTES  
ORION  
ANTARES  
ARCTURUS  
BETELGUESE  
BOGARDUS  
CANOPUS  
CAPELLA  
CASTOR A  
DENEB  
58  
AURIGA  
CARINA  
63  
42  
AURIGA  
GEMINI  
78  
232  
114  
8
CYGNUS  
LEO  
+45 17  
+1434  
-1759  
+0953  
-2938  
-6024  
+2328  
+15 12  
-0258  
+8917  
+2802  
+05 14  
+11 58  
DENEBOLA  
DIPHDA  
CETUS  
238  
247  
144  
17  
ENIF  
PEGASUS  
PISCES AUST.  
CENTAURUS  
ARIES  
FOMALHAUT  
HADAR  
HAMAL  
249  
20  
MARKAB  
MIRA  
PEGASUS  
CETUS  
19  
POLARIS  
POLLUX  
URSA MINOR  
GEMINI  
81  
80  
PROCYON  
REGULUS  
RIGEL  
CANIS MINOR  
LEO  
100  
41  
ORION  
-0812  
-1643  
-11 10  
+3847  
67  
SIRIUS  
CANIS MAJOR  
VIRGO  
138  
214  
SPICA  
VEGA  
LYRA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 2  
2. Star Charts  
(for Northern Hemisphere Observers)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 4  
APPENDIX D: LX200 64,359-  
OBJECT LIBRARY  
The following guide to VQs was used in the visual observation  
process:  
1. The LX200 64,359-Object Library  
The LX200 64,359-Object Library is a collection of the most  
studied and fantastic objects in the sky. It includes:  
15,928 SAO (Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory)  
Catalog of Stars: All stars brighter than 7th magnitude.  
12,921 UGC (Uppsala General Catalog) Galaxies:  
Complete catalog.  
7,840 NGC (New General Catalog) objects: Complete  
Catalog.  
5,386 1C (Index Catalog) objects: Complete catalog.  
21,815 GCVS (General Catalog of Variable Stars) objects:  
Complete catalog.  
351 Alignment Stars: LX200 alignment stars.  
110 M (Messier) objects: Complete catalog.  
8 major planets from Mercury to Pluto.  
This appendix has three object listings in sections 2, 3, and 4.  
Section 2 (page 36) is a partial list of 278 of the best NGC objects.  
These are most of the best objects in the sky, and as such, make  
good first targets. Section 3 (page 43) is a list of the 250 brightest  
stars and 100 double stars. The complete Messier list is shown in  
Section 4 (page 49).  
The above databases are accessed through the M, STAR, and  
CNGC keys. The M key accesses the M object database only; the  
STAR key the SAO, STAR, GCVS, and planet databases; and the  
CNGC key the UGC, NGC, and 1C databases.  
When the STAR or CNGC key is pressed, the display will show  
which database is currently active. At this point you can enter the  
object number for that database, or hit ENTER to bring up the  
menu to change databases. The LX200 will remember which  
database was last used.  
All, or very nearly all, of the objects in the CNGC are visible with  
standard instrumentation and observing conditions used to obtain  
the visual quality ratings. It is a good indication of what to expect  
with similar equipment by experienced deep-sky observers in  
excellent conditions. Naturally smaller telescopes and/or less  
optimal observing conditions will lower the apparent quality of all  
objects.  
a. SAO Catalog  
The standard Star catalog used in astronomy, this catalog  
includes all stars brighter than 7th magnitude.  
b. UGC Catalog  
This catalog of galaxies includes objects as faint as 15th  
magnitude.  
The following is a description of the format of the optional CNGC  
listing for each object:  
COLUMN  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
c. CNGC Catalog  
The CNGC is enhanced from the RNGC in many ways. Angular  
sizes are given in arc-seconds on the CNGC listing, and in a  
convenient scaled format on the LX200 display. Magnitudes are  
given to 0.1 magnitude where possible.  
1
2
CNGC#  
RA  
CNGC 0001 - CNGC 7840  
Right Ascension  
3
4
DEC  
SIZE  
Declination  
The coordinates in the CNGC listing are listed for the year 2000.  
The LX200 calculates object positions upon power up to the  
current date (as shown on the time/date display). This makes the  
LX200 pointing more accurate.  
Size of object (arc-seconds)  
5
6
7
8
9
MAG  
Magnitude (-5.5 through 19.9)  
Type of object  
TYPE  
*
* object is not in the RNGC  
Alternate catalog name & number  
Objects have been assigned a "Visual Quality Rating" (VQ). A  
large number of VQs have been obtained by observing the objects.  
To make the VQs as useful as possible, all observations have  
been made with the same telescope and eyepiece under  
substantially identical observing conditions. Only for very small  
objects was a higher power eyepiece used. Your "Visual Quality  
ALT CAT  
VQ  
Visual Quality Rating (abcdefg ) or  
(ABCDEFG)  
10  
11  
TAGS  
Object Type # (0-F): S = Sky-Cat : T =  
Tirion  
Rating" of  
conditions.  
a
particular object will vary, largely due to sky  
COMMENTS Name, comments, other info  
If the object has been rated by observation, an upper-case  
character (ABCDEFG) is used for the VQ on the CNGC listing. If  
the object has not been observed, the VQ has been estimated by a  
computer program from the object type, size, and brightness and  
the VQ is specified in lower-case characters (abcdefg). The VQs  
for visually-rated objects are a considerably more consistent  
guide to observability and appearance than either the computed  
VQs or an examination of the type, magnitude, and size data.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
35  
The following types are distinguished in the CNGC:  
TYPE  
LEGEND  
DESCRIPTION  
0
None  
Unverified Southern Object  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
S
T
OPEN  
Open Cluster  
GLOB  
Globular Cluster  
DNEB  
Diffuse Nebula  
PNEB  
Planetary Nebula (or SN Remnant)  
Galaxy  
GAL  
OPEN + DNEB  
None  
Open Cluster + Diffuse Nebula  
Non-Existent Object  
STAR  
Star  
MULTI+STAR  
MULTI+GAL  
DNEB  
Multiple Star  
Multiple Galaxy (Usually Interacting)  
Dark Nebula in front of Diffuse Nebula  
Open Cluster in External Galaxy  
Globular Cluster in External Galaxy  
Diffuse Nebula in External Galaxy  
Open Cluster + Diffuse Nebula in Galaxy  
Object is also listed in the Sky Catalogue 2000  
Object is also listed in the Tirion Sky Atlas 2000  
GAL+OPEN  
GAL+GLOB  
GAL+DNEB  
GAL+OPEN+DNEB  
g. M (Messier) Catalog  
The M catalog has been the benchmark deep-sky catalog for  
years. Recently expanded to 110 objects, the M (Messier) catalog  
contains most of the best deep-sky objects.  
d. 1C Catalog  
This is the complete 1C catalog of a variety of objects that the  
standard NGC catalog missed.  
e. GCVS Catalog  
This is a complete catalog of variable stars (shown at the bottom  
h. Planet Catalog  
The LX200 calculates the orbital positions of the eight major  
planets for the current calendar date. To access a planet, use the  
STAR key and enter the appropriate number as indicated below:  
(NOTE: 903 is the Moon.)  
of this page).  
Variable stars from the GCVS are entered using a six digit  
number. The first two digits, refer to the constellation where the  
variable star is located and is listed in the table below. The next  
four digits are assigned sequentially within each constellation  
according to the standard sequence of variable-star designations  
(R, S, ...).  
OBJECT LIBRARY PLANET LEGEND  
PLANET  
STAR #  
PLANET  
STAR #  
MERCURY  
VENUS  
901  
902  
904  
905  
SATURN  
URANUS  
NEPTUNE  
PLUTO  
906  
907  
908  
909  
Therefore, the first star in the constellation of Virgo would be  
entered as: 860001.  
f. Star Catalog  
MARS  
The STAR catalog contains the 250 brightest stars (STAR  
1
JUPITER  
through STAR 250), 100 interesting double stars (STAR 251  
through STAR 350), plus Sigma Octantis, the southern pole star  
(STAR 351).  
Code  
Const  
Code  
Const  
Code  
Const  
LAC  
Code  
Const  
01  
AND  
23  
CIR  
45  
67  
PSA  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
ANT  
APS  
AQR  
AQL  
ARA  
ARI  
AUR  
BOO  
CAE  
CAM  
CNC  
CVN  
CMA  
CMI  
CAP  
CAR  
CAS  
CEN  
CEP  
GET  
CHA  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
COL  
COM  
CRA  
CRB  
CRV  
CRT  
CRU  
CYG  
DEL  
DOR  
DRA  
EQU  
ERI  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
LEO  
LMI  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
PUP  
PYX  
RET  
SGE  
SGR  
SCO  
SCL  
SCT  
SER  
SEX  
TAU  
TEL  
TRI  
LEP  
LIB  
LUP  
LYN  
LYR  
MEN  
MIC  
MON  
MUS  
NOR  
OCT  
OPH  
ORI  
;
'
FOR  
GEM  
GRU  
HER  
HOR  
HYA  
HYI  
TRA  
TUC  
UMA  
UMI  
VEL  
VI R  
VOL  
VUL  
PAV  
PEG  
PER  
PHE  
PIC  
IND  
PSC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
36  
2. CNGC Catalog  
MAG TYPE & DESCRIPTION  
10.4 GALAXY S- IV-V  
ALT NAME  
UGCA4  
Q TAGS COMMON NAME/COMMENTS  
SIZE  
486  
CNGC# RA  
DEC  
0045 00 14.0  
-2310  
C 5 S T  
8.1x5.8  
0055 00 15.1  
0104 0024.1  
-39 13  
-7204  
1944  
1854  
8.2  
GALAXY SBm: PEC EMISSION  
GLOB CLUS sp=G3  
b5ST  
B2ST  
32.4x6.5  
4.0v  
47Tuc  
47Tuc 16kly  
0129 00 29.9  
0134 00 30.4  
+60 14  
-33 15  
1260  
486  
6.5v  
10.1  
OPEN CLUS  
GALAXY S(B)b+  
C 1 ST  
C 5 S T  
8.1x2.6  
0188 00 44.3  
+8521  
840  
8.1v  
OPEN CLUS sp=F2  
c1 ST  
Oldest Open Cluster 5kly  
0205 00 40.4  
0221 00 42.8  
0224 00 42.8  
0225 00 43.5  
+41 42  
1044  
456  
10680  
720  
8.0  
8.2  
3.5  
7.0  
GALAXY E6:  
GALAXY E2  
GALAXY Sb l-ll  
OPEN CLUS  
UGC 426  
UGC 452  
UGC 454  
C 5 S T  
C 5 S T  
B 5 S T  
c1 ST  
M110 CompofM31 17.4x9.8  
M32 Comp of M31 7.6x5.8  
M31 Andromeda Gal 178x63  
+4053  
+41 17  
+61 48  
0247 0047.1  
0253 00 47.5  
-2044  
-25 17  
1200  
1506  
8.9  
7.1  
GALAXY S- IV  
GALAXY Scp  
UGCA11  
UGCA13  
b5ST  
C 5 S T  
20.0x7.4  
25.1x7.4  
0288 00 52.6  
0300 00 55.0  
0362 01 02.4  
-2636  
-3742  
-7051  
828  
1200  
774  
8.1v  
8.7  
6.6v  
GLOB CLUS  
GALAXY Sd III-IV  
b 2 S T  
b5ST  
b 2 S T  
20.0x14.8  
12.0x11.2  
GLOB CLUS  
0370 01 04.8  
+0207  
720  
9.3  
GALAXY lr+ V  
*IC 1613  
C5S  
0411  
01 07.9  
-71 46  
-71 32  
+6043  
+3040  
750  
750  
360  
3720  
11.0  
10.5  
7.4v  
5.7  
GLOB CLUS IN SMC  
GLOB CLUS IN SMC  
OPEN CLUS  
cD  
0458 01 14.9  
0581 01 33.3  
0598 01 33.9  
cD  
D 1 ST  
C 5 S T  
CNGC 0581  
UGC 1117  
M103  
GALAXY Sc ll-lll  
M33 Triangulum Gal 62x39  
0628 01 36.7  
+1547  
612  
9.2  
GALAXY Sc I  
UGC 1149  
D 5 S T  
M74 10.2x9.5  
0650 01 42.0  
0651 01 42.0  
0654 01 43.9  
0660 01 43.0  
+51 34  
+51 34  
+61 53  
+1338  
290  
290  
300  
546  
12.2  
12.2  
6.5V  
10.8  
PLAN NEB PART OF 0651  
PLAN NEB PART OF 0650  
OPEN CLUS  
CNGC 0650  
C4ST  
C 4 S T  
c 1 ST  
c5 S  
M76 Little Dumbbell Nebula  
Little Dumbbell Nebula  
GALAXY SBap  
UGC 1201  
UGC 1913  
9.1x4.1  
0744 01 58.6  
0752 01 57.8  
+5529  
+3741  
660  
7.9v  
5.7v  
OPEN CLUS  
c 1 ST  
c 1 ST  
3000  
OPEN CLUS sp=A5  
1200ly  
0869 02 19.1  
0884 02 22.5  
0925 02 27.3  
+5709  
+5707  
+3335  
1800  
1800  
588  
4.3p  
4.4p  
10.0  
OPEN CLUS sp=B1  
OPEN CLUS sp=BO  
GALAXY S(B)c ll-lll  
A1 ST  
A1 ST  
C 5 S T  
Double Cluster h Per 7kly  
Double Cluster x Per 8kly  
9.8x6.0  
0956 02 32.4  
+4438  
480  
8.9p  
OPEN CLUS  
c 1 S  
0957 02 33.6  
1023 02 40.5  
+5731  
+3904  
660  
522  
7.6v  
9.5  
OPEN CLUS  
GALAXY E7p  
c 1 ST  
C 5 S T  
UGC 21 54  
8.7x3.3  
1025 02 39.9  
1027 02 42.7  
-3432  
+61 33  
1200  
1200  
9.0p  
6.7v  
GALAXY dE3  
OPEN CLUS  
b5S  
20.0x13.8  
c1 ST  
1039 02 42.0  
+4247  
2100  
5.2v  
OPEN CLUS  
CNGC 1039  
C 1 ST  
M34  
1068 02 42.7  
1097 02 46.5  
1112 0251.2  
1232 03 09.7  
-0001  
-30 16  
+6027  
-2034  
414  
558  
720  
468  
8.8  
GALAXY Sbp SEYFERT  
GALAXY S(B)b l-ll 2-SYS  
OPEN CLUS + DNEB IV 3 p n  
GALAXY Sc I 2-SYS  
UGC 21 88  
UGC A41  
* 1C 1848  
D 5 S T  
C A S T  
C6ST  
CAST  
M77 6.9x5.9 Seyfert Galaxy  
9.3x6.6 2-SYS + E5  
9.3  
6.5v  
9.9  
7.8x6.9 2-SYS +SBm  
1245 03 14.6  
+47 14  
600  
8.4v  
OPEN CLUS  
c 1 ST  
GLOB CLUS  
1261  
03 12.3  
-55 14  
-41 05  
-6641  
-37 14  
414  
630  
510  
426  
8.4v  
8.5  
C 2 S T  
b 5 S T  
C5ST  
C A S T  
1291 0317.3  
1313 03 10.0  
1316 03 22.6  
GALAXY SBa  
10.5x9.1  
9.4  
8.9  
GALAXY SBd  
GALAXY S(B)Op 3-SYS  
8.5x6.6  
7.1x5.5 3-SYS  
1342 0331.6  
1360 03 33.4  
+3720  
-2551  
840  
390  
6.7v  
9.0p  
OPEN CLUS  
PLAN NEB  
c 1 ST  
C4ST  
1365 03 33.7  
1432 03 46.0  
1444 03 49.4  
-3608  
+2409  
+52 39  
588  
6600  
240  
9.5  
3.4  
6.6v  
GALAXY SBb l-ll  
OPEN CLUS + RNEB  
OPEN CLUS  
C5S  
c6S  
c1 ST  
9.8x5.5  
Pleiades M45 Blue Nebula  
1454 03 46.7  
1457 0347.1  
+6807  
+2407  
1068  
7200  
9.1  
1.6  
GALAXY S(B)c l-ll  
* 1C 342  
b 5 S T  
c6 ST  
17.8x17.4 UGC 2847  
M45 Pleiades 410ly  
OPEN CLUS + RNEB sp=B6  
* CNGC 1457  
1502 04 07.4  
1513 04 10.1  
+62 19  
+4931  
480  
540  
5.7v  
8.4v  
OPEN CLUS  
OPEN CLUS  
c 1 ST  
c 1 ST  
1528 04 15.4  
+51 15  
1440  
6.4v  
OPEN CLUS  
c 1 ST  
1545 04 20.9  
1582 04 32.2  
+50 15  
+4352  
1080  
2220  
6.2v  
7.0p  
OPEN CLUS  
c 1 ST  
c 1 S  
OPEN CLUS  
OPEN CLUS  
1647 04 46.2  
1662 04 48.5  
1664 0451.0  
+1905  
+1056  
+4342  
2700  
1200  
1080  
6.4v  
6.4v  
7.6v  
c1 ST  
c 1 S  
OPEN CLUS  
OPEN CLUS  
c 1 ST  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 7  
CNGC Catalog (continued)  
ALT NAME  
CNGC# RA  
SIZE  
MAG TYPE & DESCRIPTION  
DEC  
+2349  
Q TAGS COMMON NAME/COMMENTS  
c1 ST  
1746 05 03.6  
2520  
6.1p  
OPEN CLUS  
1763 04 56.8  
1807 05 10.7  
1817 05 12.1  
1820 05 03.8  
-6624  
+1632  
+1642  
-67 17  
1500  
1020  
960  
8.3  
OPEN CLUS + ENEB IN LMC  
OPEN CLUS  
BFS  
01 ST  
c1 ST  
cC  
7.0v  
7.7v  
9.0  
OPEN CLUS  
OPEN CLUS IN LMC  
410  
1851  
05 14.0  
-4002  
660  
7.3v  
GLOB CLUS sp=F7  
b 2 S T  
46kly X-Ray Source  
1857 05 20.1  
1893 05 22.7  
1904 05 24.2  
1912 05 28.7  
+3921  
+3324  
-2431  
+3551  
360  
660  
522  
1260  
7.0v  
7.5v  
8.0v  
6.4v  
OPEN CLUS  
OPEN CLUS + ENEB Hll  
GLOB CLUS  
c 1 ST  
c 6 S T  
D 2 S T  
C 1 ST  
CNGC 1904  
CNGC 1912  
M79  
OPEN CLUS sp=B5  
M38 4600ly  
1952 05 34.5  
+2201  
360  
8.4  
PLAN NEB EMIS SN REM  
CNGC 1952  
CNGC 1960  
B 4 S T  
M1 Crab Nebula 4kly  
M36  
1960 05 36.2  
1966 05 26.5  
1975 05 35.4  
1976 05 35.3  
+3408  
-6847  
-0441  
-0523  
720  
780  
600  
3960  
6.0v  
8.5  
OPEN CLUS  
OPEN CLUS + DNEB IN LMC  
C 1 ST  
bFS  
8.8  
3.9  
DIFF RNEB  
DIFF RNEB + ENEB  
b 3 S T  
A 3 S T  
Blue  
CNGC 1976  
M42 Orion Nebula Blue+Red  
1980 05 35.2  
-05 55  
840  
2.5  
OPEN CLUS + ENEB sp=O5  
C6ST  
Trapezium in M42 1300ly  
1981  
05 35.3  
-0426  
-05 16  
-0643  
-01 50  
1500  
1200  
960  
4.6v  
5.8  
OPEN CLUS  
DIFF RNEB + ENEB  
b 1 ST  
C 3 S T  
C 3 S T  
b3ST  
1982 05 35.5  
1999 05 36.5  
2024 05 42.0  
CNGC 1982  
CNGC 2068  
M43 Orion Nebula Extension  
9.5  
8.8  
DIFF RNEB  
DIFF ENEB Hll  
1800  
Red Near Zeta Ori  
M78 Blue 1500ly  
2068 05 46.8  
+0003  
480  
11.3  
DIFF RNEB  
C 3 S T  
2070 05 38.5  
2074 05 39.0  
2099 05 52.4  
2129 0601.1  
-6905  
-6930  
+3233  
+2318  
300  
960  
1440  
420  
8.3v  
8.5  
5.6v  
6.7v  
OPEN CLUS + ENEB IN LMC  
OPEN CLUS + ENEB IN LMC  
OPEN CLUS sp=B8  
B F S T  
bFS  
Tarantula Nebula Very Red  
30 Dor Nebula (part)  
M37 4200ly  
CNGC 2099  
CNGC 21 68  
C 1 ST  
c1 ST  
OPEN CLUS  
2168 06 08.9  
+2421  
1680  
5.1v  
OPEN CLUS sp=B5  
C 1 ST  
M35 2800ly  
2169 06 08.4  
2175 06 09.8  
2194 06 13.8  
2204 06 15.7  
+1358  
+20 19  
+1249  
-1839  
420  
1080  
600  
780  
5.9v  
6.8v  
8.5v  
8.6v  
OPEN CLUS  
OPEN CLUS + ENEB  
OPEN CLUS  
c1 ST  
C 6 S T  
c 1 ST  
c1 ST  
Red Faint/Low Contrast  
OPEN CLUS  
2215 06 20.8  
2232 06 26.8  
-07 17  
-0444  
660  
8.4v  
3.9v  
OPEN CLUS  
c1 ST  
b 1 S  
1800  
OPEN CLUS  
OPEN CLUS  
OPEN CLUS + ENEB sp=O5  
sp=B1  
1600ly  
2237 06 30.3  
2244 06 32.3  
+0503  
+0452  
4800  
1440  
7.4  
4.8v  
+ ENEB  
C 6 S T  
b 6 S T  
Cluster in Rosette Nebula  
Rosette Nebula 5300ly  
2250 06 32.8  
2251 06 34.8  
2252 06 35.0  
-0502  
+0822  
+0523  
480  
600  
1200  
8.9p  
7.3v  
7.7p  
OPEN CLUS  
c 1 S  
c1 ST  
c 1 S  
OPEN CLUS  
OPEN CLUS  
2264 0641.2  
2281 06 49.4  
2286 06 47.7  
+0953  
+41 04  
-0310  
1200  
900  
900  
3.9v  
5.4v  
7.5v  
OPEN CLUS + ENEB sp=O8  
OPEN CLUS  
OPEN CLUS  
b6ST  
c1 ST  
c1 ST  
S Mon + Cone Nebula 2400ly  
2287 0647.1  
-2045  
2280  
4.5v  
OPEN CLUS sp=B4  
CNGC 2287  
CNGC 2323  
C 1 ST  
M41 2200ly  
M50  
2301 0651.8  
2323 07 02.9  
2324 07 04.2  
2331 07 07.3  
+0028  
-0820  
+01 04  
+2721  
720  
960  
480  
1080  
6.0v  
5.9v  
8.4v  
8.5p  
OPEN CLUS  
OPEN CLUS  
OPEN CLUS  
OPEN CLUS  
c1 ST  
D 1 ST  
c 1 ST  
c 1 S  
2335 07 06.6  
-1005  
720  
7.2v  
OPEN CLUS  
c 1 ST  
2343 07 08.3  
2345 07 08.4  
2353 07 14.7  
2354 07 14.2  
-1040  
-13 10  
-1017  
-2543  
420  
720  
6.7v  
7.7v  
7.1v  
6.5v  
OPEN CLUS  
OPEN CLUS  
OPEN CLUS  
OPEN CLUS  
c 1 S  
c 1 ST  
c 1 ST  
c1 ST  
1200  
1200  
2360 07 17.7  
-1538  
-2458  
780  
480  
7.2v  
4.1v  
OPEN CLUS  
c1 ST  
2362 07 18.7  
OPEN CLUS + ENEB sp=O9  
C6ST  
Open Clus = 20' Very Red  
2374 07 24.1  
2395 07 27.1  
2396 07 28.2  
-1315  
+1335  
-11 44  
1140  
720  
600  
8.0v  
8.0v  
7.4p  
OPEN CLUS  
OPEN CLUS  
OPEN CLUS  
c1 ST  
c 1 ST  
c1 S  
2403 07 36.9  
+6536  
1068  
8.4  
GALAXY Sc  
III  
UGC3918  
b5ST  
17.8x11.0  
2420 07 38.4  
2421 07 36.3  
2422 07 36.6  
2423 07 37.2  
+21 34  
-2037  
-1429  
-1352  
600  
600  
8.3v  
8.3v  
4.4v  
6.7v  
OPEN CLUS  
OPEN CLUS  
c 1 ST  
c1 ST  
D 1 ST  
c1 ST  
1800  
1140  
OPEN CLUS sp=B3  
OPEN CLUS  
CNGC 2422  
M47 1600ly  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 8  
CNGC Catalog (continued)  
SIZE  
1620  
ALT NAME  
CNGC# RA  
MAG TYPE & DESCRIPTION  
DEC  
Q TAGS COMMON NAME/COMMENTS  
2437 0741.9  
-1449  
6.1v  
OPEN CLUS sp=B8  
CNGC 2437  
C 1 ST  
M46 5400ly (+CNGC 2438 PN)  
2447 07 44.6  
-2352  
-3758  
1320  
2700  
6.2v  
2.8v  
OPEN CLUS + DNEB  
OPEN CLUS sp=B5  
CNGC 2447  
D 6 S T  
C 1 ST  
M93 Includes dark nebula  
1 0OOly  
2451  
07 45.4  
2467 07 52.5  
2477 07 52.3  
-2624  
-3833  
480  
1620  
7.2p  
5.8v  
OPEN CLUS + ENEB  
OPEN CLUS  
C 6 S T  
C 1 ST  
Open Cluster + Red Nebula  
2516 07 58.2  
-6052  
1800  
3.8v  
OPEN CLUS sp=B8  
C 1 ST  
1200ly  
M48  
2547 08 10.7  
2548 08 13.7  
-49 16  
-0547  
-5304  
1200  
3240  
3000  
4.7v  
5.8v  
2.5v  
OPEN CLUS  
OPEN CLUS  
C 1 ST  
D 1 ST  
C 1 ST  
CNGC 2548  
* 1C 2391  
2631  
08 40.2  
OPEN CLUS II 3 p  
2632 0840.1  
2682 0851.1  
2808 09 11.9  
+1959  
5700  
3.1v  
OPEN CLUS sp=AO  
CNGC 2632  
C 1 ST  
M44 Praesepe/Beehive 590ly  
M67 Very old 2700ly  
+11 49  
1800  
6.9v  
OPEN CLUS sp=F2  
CNGC 2682  
D 1 ST  
-6451  
+5058  
+21 30  
-31 12  
828  
486  
756  
486  
6.3v  
9.3  
8.9  
GLOB CLUS sp=F8  
GALAXY Sb- I  
GALAXY Sb+l-ll  
C2ST  
C 5 S T  
b5 ST  
SOkly  
2841  
09 22.1  
UGC 4966  
UGC 5079  
UGCA181  
8.1x3.8  
12.6x6.6  
8.1x6.5  
2903 09 32.1  
2997 09 45.7  
10.6  
GALAXY Sc I  
C 5 S T  
3031  
09 55.7  
+6904  
+6941  
1542  
672  
6.9  
8.4  
GALAXY Sb l-ll  
CNGC 3031  
C 5 S T  
C 5 S T  
M81 25.7x14.1 NearM82  
M82 11.2x4.6 Exploding  
3034 09 55.9  
GALAXY P EDGE-ON  
UGC 5322  
UGCA194  
3109 1003.1  
3114 1002.7  
-26 10  
-6008  
870  
2100  
10.4  
4.2v  
GALAXY lr+ IV-V  
OPEN CLUS sp=B5  
C 5 S T  
b 1 ST  
14.5x3.5  
2800ly  
3115 1005.3  
-0743  
498  
9.2  
GALAXY E6  
c 5 S T  
8.3x3.2  
3157 1008.4  
3198 1020.0  
+12 18  
642  
9.9v  
GALAXY dE3  
* UGC 5470  
UGC 72  
c5S  
10.7x8.3  
8.3x3.7  
+4533  
-4624  
-51 43  
-5738  
498  
10.4  
6.8v  
6.0v  
4.3v  
GALAXY Sc II  
GLOB CLUS  
C 5 S T  
b 2 S T  
c1 ST  
3201  
10 17.5  
3228 1021.7  
1027.4  
1092  
1080  
480  
OPEN CLUSTER  
OPEN CLUS + DNEB I 3 m n  
3231  
* 1C 2581  
* 1C 2574  
C 6 S T  
3234 1028.5  
3242 1024.8  
+6826  
-1838  
738  
10.6  
8.6p  
GALAXY S+ IV-V  
PLAN NEB  
c 5 ST  
12.3x5.9 UGC 5666  
Ghost of Jupiter  
1250  
C 4 S T  
3293 1035.9  
3324 1037.5  
-58 14  
-5838  
360  
360  
4.7v  
6.7v  
OPEN CLUS + ENEB  
DIFF ENEB + RNEB + OPEN  
C 6 S T  
c6 ST  
9kly  
3328 1043.2  
-6424  
3000  
1.9v  
OPEN CLUS II 3 m  
* 1C 2602  
UGC 5850  
UGC 5882  
b 1 ST  
3351 1043.9  
+11 42  
444  
9.7  
GALAXY S(B)b II  
C 5 S T  
M95 7.4x5.1 NearM96  
3368 1046.7  
3372 1045.1  
+11 49  
426  
9.2  
5.3  
GALAXY Sbp  
C 5 S T  
A 6 S T  
M96 7.1x5.1 Near M95  
Eta Carina Nebula Red 9kly  
M105 4.5x4.0  
-5941  
7200  
DIFF ENEB + OPEN CLUS Hll  
3379 1047.8  
3496 1059.8  
+1235  
-6020  
270  
540  
9.3  
8.2v  
GALAXY E1 2-SYS  
OPEN CLUS  
UGC 5902  
UGC 61 50  
UGC 6225  
C A S T  
c 1 S  
3521  
11 05.9  
-0002  
-5840  
570  
8.9  
GALAXY Sb+ II  
b 5 S T  
b 1 ST  
9.5x5.0  
3532 11 06.5  
3300  
3.0v  
OPEN CLUS sp=B8  
1400ly  
3556 11 11.6  
3572 11 10.5  
+5541  
-60 14  
498  
420  
10.1  
6.6v  
GALAXY Sc NEAR EDGE-ON  
OPEN CLUS + ENEB  
C 5 S T  
C 6 S T  
M108 8.3x2.5 Near M97  
3587 11 14.8  
+5502  
194  
12.0p  
PLAN NEB  
CNGC 3587  
* 1C 271 4  
C 4 S T  
M97 Owl Nebula 12kly  
3604 11 17.9  
-6242  
720  
8.2p  
OPEN CLUS II 3m  
c 1 ST  
3621  
11 18.3  
-3249  
+1305  
+1259  
+1335  
600  
600  
522  
888  
9.9  
9.3  
9.0  
9.5  
GALAXY Sc III-IV  
GALAXY Sb II:  
UGC A232  
UGC 6328  
UGC 6346  
UGC 6350  
C 5 S T  
C5ST  
C 5 S T  
C 5 S T  
10.0x6.5  
3623 11 18.9  
3627 11 20.2  
3628 11 20.3  
M65 10.0x3.3 Near M66  
M66 8.7x4.4 Near M65  
14.8x3.6  
GALAXY Sb+ II:  
GALAXY Sb NEAR EDGE-ON  
3680 11 25.7  
-4315  
720  
7.6v  
OPEN CLUS  
c 1 ST  
3709 11 36.6  
3718 11 32.6  
3766 11 36.2  
3992 11 57.6  
-6302  
+5304  
-61 37  
+5322  
900  
522  
720  
456  
4.5v  
10.5  
5.3v  
9.8  
OPEN CLUS II 1 p n  
GALAXY SBap  
OPEN CLUS sp=B1  
GALAXY S(B)b+ I  
* 1C 2944  
UGC 624  
b 1 ST  
C 5 S T  
c 1 ST  
D5ST  
8.7x4.5  
5800ly  
M109 7.6x4.9  
;
UGC 6937  
4052 1201.9  
-63 12  
480  
8.8p  
OPEN CLUS  
c1 ST  
4111  
4192 12 13.9  
4216 12 15.9  
1207.1  
+4304  
+1454  
+1308  
288  
570  
498  
10.8  
10.1  
10.0  
GALAXY SO:  
GALAXY Sb l-ll: 3-SYS  
GALAXY Sb II  
UGC 7103  
UGC 7231  
UGC 7284  
C 5 S T  
DAST  
C 5 S T  
4.8x1.1  
M98 9.5x3.2  
8.3x2.2 Near Edge-On  
4236 12 16.7  
+6928  
1116  
9.7  
GALAXY SB+ IV  
UGC 7306  
b 5 S T  
18.6x6.9  
4244 12 17.6  
+3748  
972  
10.2  
GALAXY S- IV: EDGE-ON  
UGC 7322  
b 5 S T  
16.2x2.5  
4254 12 18.9  
4258 12 19.0  
+1425  
+4718  
324  
9.8  
8.3  
GALAXY Sc I NEAR FACE-ON  
GALAXY Sb+p  
UGC 7345  
UGC 7353  
D 5 S T  
C 5 S T  
M99 5.4x4.8  
1092  
M106 18.2x7.9  
4303 1222.0  
4321 1223.0  
+0428  
+1549  
360  
414  
9.7  
9.4  
GALAXY Sc I 2-SYS  
GALAXY Sc I FACE-ON  
UGC 7420  
UGC 7450  
DAST  
D 5 S T  
M61 6.0x5.5 Face-On  
M100 6.9x6.2 Brite Nucleus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
39  
CNGC Catalog (continued)  
ALT NAME  
CNGC# RA  
SIZE  
960  
MAG TYPE & DESCRIPTION  
DEC  
-61 54  
Q TAGS COMMON NAME/COMMENTS  
c 1 ST  
4349 1224.2  
7.4v  
OPEN CLUS  
4374 1225.1  
4382 1225.5  
+1253  
+18 11  
300  
426  
9.3  
9.2  
GALAXY E1  
GALAXY Ep 2-SYS  
UGC 7494  
UGC 7508  
C 5 S T  
C A S T  
M84 5.0x4.4 Near M86  
M85 7.1x5.2  
4395 1225.8  
4406 1226.3  
+3332  
+1256  
774  
444  
10.2  
9.2  
GALAXY S+ IV-V  
GALAXY E3  
UGC 7524  
UGC 7532  
c5S  
C 5 S T  
12.9x11.0  
M86 7.4x5.5  
4438 1227.8  
+1300  
558  
10.1  
GALAXY Sap  
UGC 7574  
c5 ST  
9.3x3.9  
4472 1229.8  
4486 1230.9  
+0800  
+1223  
+1425  
+0006  
534  
432  
414  
612  
8.4  
8.6  
GALAXY E4  
UGC 7629  
UGC 7654  
UGC 7675  
UGC 7694  
C 5 S T  
DAST  
D 5 S T  
C A S T  
M49 8.9x7.4  
M87 7.2x6.8 + CNGC 4471  
GALAXY E1 + EO 2-SYS  
GALAXY Sb+ I MULTI-ARM  
GALAXY Sc 2-SYS  
4501  
1232.1  
9.5  
10.5  
M88 6.9x3.9  
4517 1232.8  
10.2x1.9 Near Edge-On  
4548 1235.5  
+1429  
324  
10.2  
GALAXY SBb + Sc 2-SYS  
UGC 7753  
D A S T  
M91 5.4x4.4 Near CNGC 4571  
M89 4.2x4.2  
4552 12 35.7  
4559 1236.0  
4565 1236.4  
+12 33  
+2757  
+2559  
252  
630  
972  
9.8  
9.9  
9.6  
GALAXY EO  
UGC 7760  
UGC 7766  
UGC 7772  
D 5 S T  
C A S T  
BAST  
GALAXY Sc ll-lll 3-SYS  
GALAXY Sb I: + 3-SYS FNT  
10.5x4.9 Coarse Structure  
M40 16.2x2.8 Edge-On Lane  
4569 1236.9  
+1309  
570  
9.5  
GALAXY Sb+  
UGC 7786  
C 5 S T  
M90 9.5x4.7  
4579 1237.8  
+11 49  
324  
9.8  
UGC 7796  
C 5 S T  
M58 5.4x4.4 Near CNGC 4621  
GALAXY Sb  
4590 1239.4  
4594 1239.9  
4605 1240.0  
-2646  
-11 38  
+61 36  
720  
534  
330  
8.2v  
8.3  
11.0  
CNGC 4590  
CNGC 4594  
UGC 7831  
D 2 S T  
C 5 S T  
C 5 S T  
M68  
GLOB CLUS  
GALAXY Sb-  
GALAXY SBcp Edge-On  
M104 8.9x4.1 "Sombrero"  
5.5x2.3 Edge-On  
4609 1242.4  
-62 59  
300  
6.9v  
c 1 ST  
OPEN CLUS  
4621  
4631  
1242.1  
1242.1  
+11 38  
306  
906  
9.8  
9.3  
GALAXY E3  
UGC 7858  
UGC 7865  
D 5 S T  
B 5 S T  
M59 5.1x3.4 Near CNGC 4579  
15.1x3.3 Edge-On  
+3232  
GALAXY Sc III Edge-On  
4649 1243.7  
4656 1243.9  
4725 1250.5  
+11 33  
+32 10  
+2533  
432  
828  
660  
8.8  
10.4  
9.2  
GALAXY E1  
GALAXY Sc IV + lr+ 2-SYS  
GALAXY S(B)b I  
UGC 7898  
UGC 7907  
UGC 7989  
D 5 S T  
C A S T  
C 5 S T  
M60 7.2x6.2 Near CNGC 4621  
13.8x3.3 Near CNGC 4631  
11.0x7.9  
M94 11.0x9.1  
4736 1250.9  
+41 08  
660  
8.2  
GALAXY Sb-p II:  
UGC 7996  
C 5 S T  
4755 1253.6  
4762 1253.0  
4826 12 56.7  
-6021  
600  
522  
558  
4.2v  
10.2  
8.5  
OPEN CLUS sp=B3  
GALAXY SBO  
GALAXY Sb-  
c 1 ST  
C5ST  
C 5 S T  
Jewel Box 6800ly  
8.7x1.6  
M64 9.3x5.4 Black Eye Gal  
+11 14  
+21 41  
UGC 801 6  
UGC 8062  
4833 1259.4  
-7052  
810  
7.4v  
GLOBCLUS  
b 2 S T  
4852 1300.1  
-5936  
660  
8.9p  
OPEN CLUS  
c 1 ST  
4945 1305.3  
5024 13 13.0  
5033 13 13.5  
5053 13 16.4  
-4929  
+18 10  
+3636  
+1740  
1200  
756  
630  
630  
9.5  
GALAXY SBc: 2-SYS  
GLOB CLUS  
GALAXY Sb+ l-ll:  
GLOB CLUS  
bAST  
D 2 S T  
c5 ST  
20.0x4.  
M53  
10.5x5.6  
7.7v  
10.1  
9.8v  
CNGC 5024  
UGC 8307  
C2ST  
5055 13 15.8  
+4202  
738  
8.6  
GALAXY Sb+ II  
UGC 8334  
C 5 S T  
M63 12.3x7.6 Sunflower Gal  
5102 1321.9  
5128 1325.3  
-3639  
-4301  
558  
1092  
10.0  
7.0  
GALAXY SO  
GALAXY SOp  
C5ST  
B5ST  
9.3x3.5  
18.2x14.5 CentarusA X-Ray  
5138 1327.3  
5139 1326.8  
-5901  
-4729  
480  
2178  
7.6v  
3.7v  
OPEN CLUS  
GLOB CLUS Sp=F7  
c 1 ST  
A 2 ST  
Omega Cen  
UGC 8493  
Omega Centauri 17kly  
5194 1330.0  
+47 11  
660  
8.4  
GALAXY Sc I 2-SYS FACE  
BAST  
M51 11.0x7.8 Whirlpool Gal  
5236 1337.1  
5272 1342.3  
-2951  
+2823  
672  
972  
8.2  
6.4v  
GALAXY Sc l-ll FACE-ON  
GLOB CLUS sp=F7  
CNGC 5236  
CNGC 5272  
B 5 S T  
B 2 S T  
M83 11.2x10.2  
M3 35kly  
5281 1346.7  
5286 1346.2  
-6254  
-51 22  
300  
546  
5.9v  
7.6v  
OPEN CLUS  
GLOB CLUS  
c 1 ST  
b 2 S T  
5316 1354.0  
-61 52  
840  
6.0v  
OPEN CLUS  
c 1 ST  
5457 1403.3  
5460 1407.7  
5474 1405.1  
5617 1429.8  
+5421  
-48 19  
+5340  
-6044  
1614  
1500  
270  
7.7  
GALAXY Sc I FACE-ON  
OPEN CLUS  
GALAXY Sc  
UGC 8981  
UGC 901 3  
C5S  
M101 26.9x26.3 Pinwheel  
4.5x4.2  
5.6v  
10.9  
6.3v  
c 1 ST  
C5 ST  
c 1 ST  
600  
OPEN CLUS  
5662 1435.1  
-5634  
720  
5.5v  
OPEN CLUS  
c 1 ST  
7.9x1.7  
5746 1445.0  
5749 1448.9  
5822 1505.3  
5823 15 05.7  
+01 57  
-5432  
-5421  
-5536  
474  
480  
2400  
600  
10.6  
8.8p  
6.5p  
7.9v  
GALAXY Sb EDGE-ON  
OPEN CLUS  
UGC 9499  
C 5 S T  
c1 ST  
c1 ST  
c 1 ST  
OPEN CLUS  
OPEN CLUS  
5824 1504.0  
-3305  
372  
9.0v  
GLOB CLUS  
C2ST  
5897 15 17.4  
5904 15 18.6  
-21 00  
+0205  
756  
1044  
8.6v  
5.8v  
GLOB CLUS  
GLOB CLUS sp=F6  
b 2 S T  
B 2 S T  
CNGC 5904  
UGC 9801  
M5 26kly  
12.3x1.8  
5907 15 15.9  
5925 1527.7  
+56 19  
-5432  
738  
900  
10.4  
8.4p  
GALAXY Sb+ II:  
OPEN CLUS  
C 5 S T  
c 1 ST  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 0  
CNGC Catalog (continued)  
SIZE  
ALT NAME  
DEC  
MAG TYPE & DESCRIPTION  
CNGCtf RA  
Q TAGS COMMON NAME/COMMENTS  
4700ly  
5927 1528.0  
5986 1546.1  
6025 1603.7  
6067 16 13.3  
-5040 -  
3746 -  
6030 -54  
13  
720 588 8.3v  
GLOBCLUS GLOBCLUS OPEN  
CLUS OPEN CLUS sp=B3  
b2ST  
b2 ST c  
1 ST c 1  
ST  
720 780  
7.1v  
5.1v  
5.6v  
6087 16 18.9  
6093 16 17.1  
-5754  
-2300  
720  
534  
5.4v  
7.2v  
OPEN CLUS  
GLOB CLUS  
c 1 ST  
D 2 S T  
CNGC 6093  
CNGC 6121  
M80  
6101 1625.7  
6121 1623.7  
-72 13  
-2631  
642  
1578  
9.3v  
5.9v  
GLOB CLUS  
GLOBCLUS sp=GO  
C 2 S T  
B2ST  
M4 14kly  
6124 1625.6  
6144 1627.2  
-4042  
-2603  
1740  
558  
5.8v  
9.1v  
OPEN CLUS  
GLOB CLUS  
c1 ST  
C 2 S T  
6152 1632.8  
-5238  
1800  
8.1p  
OPEN CLUS  
c 1 ST  
6167 1634.4  
6169 1634.1  
-4936  
-4403  
480  
420  
6.7v  
6.6p  
OPEN CLUS  
OPEN CLUS  
c 1 ST  
c 1 S  
6171  
6192 1640.4  
1632.5  
-1302  
-4323  
600  
480  
8.1v  
8.5p  
GLOB CLUS  
OPEN CLUS  
CNGC 6171  
D2 ST  
c 1 ST  
M107  
6193 1641.4  
-4846  
900  
5.2v  
OPEN CLUS + ENEB + RNEB  
c6 ST  
6200 1644.3  
6205 1641.7  
-4729  
+3627  
720  
996  
7.4v  
5.9v  
OPEN CLUS  
c 1 S  
GLOB CLUS sp=F6  
CNGC 6205  
CNGC 621 8  
B2ST  
M13 Hercules Globular  
6208 1649.5  
6218 1647.2  
-5349  
-01 57  
960  
870  
7.2v  
6.6v  
OPEN CLUS  
GLOB CLUS sp=F8  
c 1 ST  
D 2 S T  
M12 24kly  
6231 1654.3  
-41 48  
900  
2.6v  
OPEN CLUS + ENEB sp=O9  
b6 ST  
In 240' ENEB 5800ly  
6242 1655.6  
6250 1658.0  
-3930  
-4548  
540  
480  
6.4v  
5.9v  
OPEN CLUS  
OPEN CLUS  
c 1 ST  
c 1 ST  
6254 1657.1  
6259 1700.7  
-0407  
-4441  
906  
600  
6.6v  
8.0v  
GLOBCLUS sp=G1  
OPEN CLUS  
CNGC 6254  
D 2 S T  
c 1 ST  
M10 20kly  
6266 1701.3  
6273 1702.6  
-3007  
846  
6.6v  
GLOB CLUS OBLATE  
CNGC 6266  
CNGC 6273  
D 2 S T  
M62 Non-symmetrical  
-26 15  
-3753  
-2445  
-2634  
810  
480  
336  
474  
7.2v  
5.4v  
9.0v  
8.2v  
GLOB CLUS OBLATE  
OPEN CLUS + ENEB  
GLOBCLUS  
D 2 S T  
C6ST  
c2 ST  
M19 Oblate Shape Globular  
6281  
1704.8  
6284 1704.5  
6293 1710.3  
GLOB CLUS  
C 2 S T  
6304 17 14.6  
-2928  
408  
8.4v  
GLOB CLUS  
C2ST  
6316 17 16.6  
6322 1718.5  
6333 17 19.2  
-2808  
-4257  
-1831  
+4309  
294  
600  
558  
672  
9.0v  
6.0v  
7.9v  
6.5v  
GLOBCLUS  
C 2 S T  
c 1 ST  
D2 ST  
D2ST  
OPEN CLUS  
GLOB CLUS  
CNGC 6333  
CNGC 6341  
M9  
6341  
17 17.2  
GLOB CLUS sp=F1  
M92 X-Ray Source 26kly  
6353 1724.7  
-4957  
720  
6.9v  
OPEN CLUS II 3 m  
* 1C 4651  
c 1 ST  
6356 1723.7  
6362 1731.8  
6366 1727.7  
6367 1725.2  
-1749  
-6703  
-0505  
+3745  
432  
642  
498  
45  
8.4v  
8.3v  
10.0v  
14.5  
GLOB CLUS  
GLOB CLUS  
GLOB CLUS  
GALAXY  
c2S  
b2 ST  
C 2 S T  
f 5  
6383 1734.7  
-3235  
300  
5.5v  
OPEN CLUS + ENEB  
C 6 S T  
ENEB is 80' in diameter  
6388 1736.3  
6397 1740.9  
6398 1720.2  
6400 1740.8  
-4445  
-5341  
+5755  
-3656  
522  
6.9v  
5.7v  
GLOB CLUS  
b 2 S T  
b 2 S T  
c5S  
1542  
2010  
480  
GLOBCLUS sp=F5  
GALAXY dE3  
OPEN CLUS  
9kly  
11. 9p  
8.8p  
* UGC 10822  
33.5x18.9 Maybe Can't  
See  
c 1 ST  
6401  
1738.6  
-2355  
336  
9.5v  
GLOB CLUS  
d 2 S T  
6402 1737.6  
6405 1740.1  
-03 17  
-32 13  
702  
900  
7.6v  
4.2v  
GLOB CLUS  
OPEN CLUS sp=B4  
CNGC 6402  
CNGC 6405  
D 2 S T  
C 1 ST  
M14  
M6 1500ly  
6416 1744.4  
6425 1747.0  
-3221  
-31 31  
1080  
480  
8.4v  
7.2v  
OPEN CLUS  
OPEN CLUS  
c1 ST  
c 1 ST  
6431  
1746.3  
+0543  
2460  
4.2v  
OPEN CLUS III 2p  
* 1C 4665  
b 1 ST  
6432 1747.9  
-3000  
-3703  
-30 13  
20  
13.6p  
7.4v  
8.2p  
PLAN NEB  
f4S  
PK 359-0.1  
M7 800ly  
6441  
6451  
1750.2  
1750.7  
468  
480  
GLOB CLUS  
OPEN CLUS  
c2 ST  
c1 ST  
6469 1752.9  
-2221  
720  
8.2p  
OPEN CLUS  
c 1 ST  
6475 1754.0  
-3449  
4800  
3.3v  
OPEN CLUS sp=B5  
CNGC 6475  
C 1 ST  
6494 1757.0  
6514 1802.3  
6520 1803.5  
6522 1803.6  
-1901  
-2302  
-2754  
-3002  
1620  
1740  
360  
5.5v  
6.3v  
6.7p  
8.6v  
OPEN CLUS sp=B8  
DIFF ENEB + OPEN CLUS Hll  
OPEN CLUS  
CNGC 6494  
CNGC 6514  
D 1 ST  
B6ST  
c 1 ST  
C 2 S T  
M23 1400ly  
M20 Trifid Nebula 3500ly  
336  
GLOB CLUS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
42  
CNGC Catalog (continued)  
ALT NAME  
CNGC 6981  
Q TAGS COMMON NAME/COMMENTS  
SIZE  
354  
CNGC# RA  
DEC  
-12 33  
MAG TYPE & DESCRIPTION  
6981 20 53.5  
9.4v  
GLOB CLUS  
D 2 S T  
M72  
6994 20 59.0  
7000 21 01.8  
7009 21 04.3  
7036 21 12.1  
-1237  
+44 12  
-11 22  
+4743  
168  
7200  
100  
240  
8.9p  
6.6  
8.3p  
6.8v  
OPENCLUS  
CNGC 6994  
D 1 ST  
b 3 S T  
C 4 S T  
c 1 ST  
M73  
DIFFENEB Hll  
PLAN NEB  
North American Nebula 3kly  
Saturn Nebula 3000ly  
OPEN CLUS I 1 m  
* 1C 1369  
7039 21 12.2  
+4539  
1500  
7.6v  
OPEN CLUS  
c1 S  
7063 21 24.4  
7078 21 30.0  
+3630  
+12 10  
480  
738  
7.0v  
6.4v  
OPEN CLUS  
GLOB CLUS sp=F2  
c1 S  
CNGC 7078  
CNGC 7089  
C 2 S T  
M15 X-Ray Source 34kly  
M2 40kly  
7082 21 29.4  
7086 21 30.6  
+4705  
+51 35  
1500  
540  
7.2v  
8.4v  
OPEN CLUS  
OPEN CLUS  
c 1 ST  
c 1 ST  
7089 21 33.5  
-0050  
774  
6.5v  
GLOB CLUS Sp=F4  
C 2 S T  
7092 21 32.2  
7093 21 39.1  
+4826  
+5730  
1920  
3000  
4.6v  
3.5v  
OPEN CLUS  
OPEN CLUS + DNEB II 3 m n  
CNGC 7092  
* 1C 1396  
D 1 ST  
b 6 S T  
M39  
.-  
7099 21 40.3  
7143 21 53.4  
-23 11  
+47 16  
660  
540  
7.5v  
7.2v  
GLOB CLUS  
CNGC 7099  
* 1C 5146  
D2S  
M30  
OPEN CLUS + DNEB IV 2 p n  
C 6 S T  
7160 21 53.7  
7202 22 10.5  
+6236  
+5250  
420  
480  
6.1v  
9.0p  
OPEN CLUS  
c1 ST  
c 1 ST  
OPEN CLUS II 1 p  
* 1C 1434  
c 1 ST  
c 1 ST  
7209 22 05.2  
7243 22 15.3  
+4630  
+4953  
1500  
1260  
6.7v  
6.4v  
OPEN CLUS  
OPEN CLUS  
7331 22 37.1  
+3426  
642  
9.5  
GALAXY Sb l-ll  
UGC 12113  
C 5 S T  
10.7x4.0  
7380 22 47.0  
+58 06  
720  
7.2v  
OPEN CLUS + ENEB  
C6ST  
Red Nebula  
7635 23 20.7  
7640 2322.1  
+61 12  
+4051  
900  
642  
12.8  
10.9  
DIFFENEB  
GALAXY S(B)b+ II:  
C 3 S T  
C 5 S T  
Bubble Nebula Red  
10.7x2.5  
M52  
UGC 12554  
CNGC 7654  
7654 23 24.2  
7686 23 30.2  
+61 36  
+4908  
780  
900  
6.9v  
5.6v  
OPEN CLUS  
OPENCLUS  
D 1 ST  
c 1 ST  
7790 23 58.5  
7793 23 57.9  
7815 00 02.1  
+61 13  
-3234  
-1528  
1020  
546  
612  
8.5v  
9.1  
10.9  
OPEN CLUS sp=B1  
GALAXY Sdm III-IV  
GALAXY lr+ IV-V  
c1 ST  
c 5 S T  
C5S  
10300ly  
9.1x6.6  
10.2x4.2  
* UGC A444  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 3  
3. STAR Catalog  
RA  
Q TAGS  
COMMON NAME/COMMENTS  
STAR #  
*
1
ALT NAME  
Alpha And  
DEC  
SIZE  
MAG TYPE & DESCRIPTION  
00 08.3  
+2906  
2.1v  
STAR  
B8.5p IV:(Hg+Mn)  
8
ST Alpheratz  
*
2
3
00 09.2  
00 13.2  
00 25.7  
00 26.3  
+59 10  
+15 12  
-77 15  
-42 18  
2.3v  
2.8v  
2.8v  
2.4v  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
F2 III-IV  
B2 IV  
Beta Cas  
Gamma Peg  
Beta Hyi  
8
8
8
8
ST Caph  
ST Algenib  
*
*
4
G1 IV  
KO 1Mb  
ST  
*
5
Alpha Phe  
ST Ankaa  
. 6  
00 39.4  
+3052  
3.3v  
STAR  
K3 III  
Delta And A  
8
ST  
* 7  
* 8  
* 9  
* 10  
00 40.5  
00 43.6  
00 56.7  
01 06.1  
+5633  
-1759  
+6043  
-4643  
2.2v  
2.0v  
2.5v  
3.3v  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
KO Ilia  
Alpha Cas  
Beta Get  
Gamma Cas  
Beta Phe AB  
8
8
9
9
ST Shedir  
G9.5 III  
BO IVnpe(shell) + ?  
G8 III  
ST Diphda  
ST Marj B=8.8  
ST B=Similar mag &  
20  
10  
spectrum  
@759d  
. 11  
01 09.8  
+3537  
2.1v  
STAR  
MO Ilia  
Beta And  
8
ST Mirach  
» 12 01 25.8  
* 13 01 37.7  
+60 15  
-57 14  
2.7v  
0.5v  
STAR  
STAR  
AS IV  
Delta Cas  
Alpha Eri  
8
8
ST Ruchbah Eel-Bin  
ST Achernar  
B3 Vnp (shell)  
* 14 01 54.7  
* 15 01 58.7  
+2049  
-61 34  
2.6v  
2.9v  
STAR  
STAR  
A5 V  
A9 Ill-IVn  
Beta Ari  
Alpha Hyi  
8
8
ST Sharatan  
ST  
• 16 02 04.0  
+42 21  
+2328  
100  
2.3v  
2.0v  
STAR  
STAR  
K3 llb + B9 V +AO V  
K2 Illab  
Gamma And A  
Alpha Ari  
9
8
ST Almaak B=5.4 C=6.2  
ST Hamal  
* 17  
02 07.2  
* 18  
« 19  
02 09.5  
02 14.7  
+3459  
+89 17  
3.0v  
2.0v  
STAR  
STAR  
A5 IV  
F5-8 Ib + F3 V  
Beta Tri  
AlphaUMiA  
8
9
ST  
180  
10  
ST Polaris B=8.2  
* 20  
02 19.4  
-0258  
-40 19  
+0405  
2.1v  
3.2v  
2.5v  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
M5.5-9 Ille + Bpe  
Omicron Get A  
Theta Eri A  
Alpha Get  
9
8
8
ST Mira B=9.5  
ST Acamar  
ST Menkar  
- 21 02 58.3  
* 22 03 02.3  
AS IV  
M1.5llla  
* 23 03 04.8  
* 24 03 08.2  
+5331  
+4058  
2.9v  
2.1v  
STAR  
STAR  
G8 III +A2 V  
B8 V + F:  
Gamma Per  
Beta Per  
8
8
ST  
ST Algol  
* 25 03 24.4  
+4952  
1.8v  
STAR  
F5lb  
Alpha Per  
8
ST Mirphak  
*
26 03 43.0  
+4748  
+2706  
3.0v  
2.9v  
STAR  
STAR  
B5 Illn  
B7llln  
Delta Per  
Eta Tau  
8
8
ST  
*
27 03 47.6  
ST Alcyone  
*
28 03 47.2  
29 03 54.2  
30 03 57.8  
-74 15  
+31 54  
+4001  
3.2v  
2.9v  
2.9v  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
M2 III  
Gamma Hyi  
Zeta Per A  
Epsilon Per A  
8
9
9
ST  
*
130  
90  
B1 Ib + B8 V  
B0.5 IV + B9.5 V  
ST B=9.2  
ST B=7.9  
*
*
31 03 58.0  
-1330  
-5502  
3.0v  
3.3v  
STAR  
STAR  
M0.5 Ill-lllb  
Gamma Eri  
8
9
ST Zaurak  
*
32 04 34.0  
2
AOp lll:(Si) + B9 IV  
Alpha Dor AB  
ST A=3.8 B=4.3  
*
33 04 35.9  
34 04 49.9  
35 04 57.0  
+1631  
+0657  
+3311  
0.9v  
3.2v  
2.7v  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
K5III  
F6 V  
K3II  
Alpha Tau A  
PiA3 Ori  
lota Aur  
8
8
8
ST Aldebaran  
ST Hassaleh  
ST Ayn  
*
*
*
36 05 02.0  
+4349  
3.0v  
STAR  
A9 lae + B  
Epsilon Aur A  
8
ST Anz  
*
37 05 05.5  
38 05 06.6  
39 05 07.9  
-2222  
+41 14  
-0505  
-16 12  
3.2v  
3.2v  
2.8v  
3.1v  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
K5 III  
Epsilon Lep  
Eta Ori AB  
Theta Eri  
Mu Lep  
8
8
8
8
ST  
*
B3 V  
A3 Illn  
B9p IV: (Hg+Mn)  
ST Hoedus II  
ST Kursa  
ST  
*
*
40  
• 41  
* 42  
05 12.9  
05 14.6  
05 16.6  
-08 12  
90  
0.1v  
STAR  
B8 lae + B5 V  
Beta Ori A  
9
ST Rigel B=7.6 C=7.6  
+4600  
-0224  
+0621  
+2837  
0.1v  
3.3v  
1.6v  
1.7v  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
G6: III + G2: III  
B1 IV + B  
B2 III  
Alpha Aur AB  
Eta Ori AB  
Gamma Ori  
8
8
8
8
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
Capella  
* 43 05 24.5  
* 44 05 25.2  
* 45 05 26.3  
Bellatrix  
Alnath  
B7 III  
Beta Tau  
*
|G5II + ?  
46 05 28.3  
-2046  
26  
2.8v  
STAR  
9
ST B=7.4  
Beta Lep A  
*
47  
05 32.0  
-00 19  
-1749  
2.2v  
2.6v  
STAR  
STAR  
O9.5 II  
FO Ib  
8ST  
8
Delta Ori A  
Alpha Lep  
Mintaka  
Arneb  
*
48 05 32.7  
ST  
*
*
49  
05 46.5  
-0555  
-01 12  
110  
2.8v  
1.7v  
STAR  
STAR  
O9 III + B7 Nip  
BO la  
lota Ori A  
Epsilon Ori  
9ST  
8
Nair al Salt B=7.3  
Alnilam  
50 05 36.2  
ST  
ST  
ST  
*
*
51 05 37.6  
+21 09  
3.0v  
STAR  
B2 Illpe (shell)  
Zeta Tau  
8
52 05 39.7  
53 05 40.8  
54 05 47.8  
-3404  
-01 56  
-0940  
2.6v  
2.1v  
2.1v  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
B7 IV  
Alpha Col A  
Zeta Ori A  
Kappa Ori  
8
9
8
Phaet  
*
*
24  
40  
O9.5 lb + BO III  
B0.5 la  
ST Alnitak B=4.2  
ST  
Saiph  
Wezn  
*
*
55 0551.0  
-3546  
3.1v  
STAR  
K1.5 III  
Beta Col  
8
ST  
56 05 55.2  
+0725  
0.4v  
STAR  
M2 lab  
Alpha Ori  
8
ST  
Betelgeuse  
*
*
57 05 59.5  
58 05 59.8  
+4457  
+37 13  
1.9v  
2.6v  
STAR  
STAR  
A1 IV  
AOp III: (si) + G2 V  
Beta Aur  
Theta Aur AB  
8
9
ST  
ST  
Menkalinan  
Bogardus B=7.2  
G2V  
*
*
59  
06 14.9  
+2231  
-3003  
3.3v  
3.0v  
STAR  
STAR  
M3III  
B2.5 V  
Eta Gem  
Zeta CMa  
8
8
ST  
ST  
Propus  
Phurud  
60 06 20.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 4  
STAR Catalog (continued)  
RA  
STAR#  
*61  
DEC  
+2231  
SIZE  
MAG TYPE & DESCRIPTION  
ALT NAME  
Mu Gem  
Q TAGS  
8ST  
COMMON NAME/COMMENTS  
Tejat Posterior  
06 22.9  
2.8v  
STAR M3 Illab  
*62  
*63  
0622.7  
06 24.0  
-1758  
-5242  
2.0v  
STAR B1 ll-lll  
Beta CMa  
Alpha Car  
8ST  
8ST  
Murzim  
Canopus  
Alhena  
-0.7v STAR A9 II  
*64  
*65  
06 37.7  
06 37.7  
+1624  
-4312  
1.9v  
3.2v  
STAR A1 IVs  
STAR B8 Illn  
Gamma Gem  
Nu Pup  
8ST  
8ST  
*66  
06 44.0  
+2508  
3.0v  
STAR G8 Ib  
Epsilon Gem  
8ST  
Mebsuta  
*67  
*68  
*69  
*70  
06 45.2  
06 48.2  
06 49.9  
06 58.6  
-1643  
-61 56  
-5037  
-2858  
95  
-1.5v STAR AOmA1 Va  
Alpha CMa A  
Alpha Pic  
Tau Pup  
9ST  
8ST  
8ST  
8ST  
Sirius B=8.5 50y  
3.3v  
2.9v  
1.5v  
STAR A6Vn  
STAR K1 III  
STAR B2 II  
Epsilon CMa A  
Adara  
*71  
0703.1  
-2350  
3.0v  
STAR B3 lab  
OmicronA2 CMa  
8ST  
*72  
*73  
*74  
*75  
07 08.4  
07 13.5  
07 17.2  
07 24.2  
-2623  
-4438  
-3705  
-26 19  
1.8v  
2.6v  
2.7v  
2.5v  
STAR F8 la  
STAR M5 Ills  
STAR K3 Ib  
STAR B5 la  
Delta CMa  
L2 Pup  
8ST  
8ST  
8ST  
8ST  
Wezen  
HR2748  
Pi Pup  
Eta CMa  
Aludra  
*76  
07 27.2  
07 29.3  
+08 17  
-43 17  
2.9v  
3.3v  
STAR B8 V  
Beta CMi  
8ST  
9ST  
Gomeisa  
'77  
220  
STAR K5 III + G5: V  
Sigma Pup A  
'78  
*79  
*80  
07 34.6  
07 34.6  
07 39.3  
+31 53  
+31 53  
+05 14  
25  
25  
40  
1.9v  
2.9v  
0.4v  
STAR A1 V + A2mA5  
STAR A2mA5 + A1 V  
STAR F5 IV-V + ?  
Alpha Gem A  
Alpha Gem B  
Alpha CMi A  
9ST  
9ST  
9ST  
Castor A  
Castor B  
Procyon B=10.3  
*81  
*82  
07 45.4  
07 49.3  
+2802  
-2452  
1.1v  
3.3v  
STAR KO Nib  
STAR G6 Ib  
Beta Gem  
•., Xi Pup  
8ST  
8ST  
Pollux  
*83  
*84  
*85  
08 03.7  
08 07.6  
08 09.5  
-3001  
-24 19  
-4721  
2.3v  
2.7v  
1.7v  
STAR O5 lafn  
STAR F6 lip (var)  
STAR WC8 + O9 I:  
8ST  
8 ST  
8ST  
- Zeta Pup  
Rho Pup  
Naos  
GammaA2 Vel  
*86  
08 22.5  
-5931  
1.9v  
STAR K3: III  
8ST  
Epsilon Car  
Avior  
*87  
*88  
08 44.7  
08 55.5  
-5443  
+0556  
20  
40  
2.0v  
3.1v  
STAR A1 IV  
STAR G9 ll-lll  
9ST  
8ST  
Delta Vel AB  
Zeta Hya  
B=5.0  
*89  
*90  
08 59.3  
09 08.0  
+4803  
-4325  
3.1v  
2.2v  
STAR A7 IVn + M1 V  
STAR K4 Ib-lla  
9ST  
8ST  
lota UMa A  
Lambda Vel  
Talitha BC=10.8  
Suhail  
*91  
09 13.3  
-6944  
1.7v  
STAR A1 III  
8ST  
Beta Car  
Miaplacidus  
Turais  
*92  
*93  
0917.1  
0921.1  
-59 17  
+3423  
2.2v  
3.1v  
STAR A8 II  
STAR K7 Illab  
8ST  
8ST  
lota Car  
Alpha Lyn  
*94  
*95  
09 22.1  
-5501  
-0839  
2.5V  
2.0v  
STAR B2 IV-V  
STAR K3 ll-lll  
8ST  
8ST  
Kappa Vel  
Alpha Hya  
09 27.6  
Alphard  
HR3803  
*96  
0931.2  
-5701  
3.1v  
STAR K5 III  
8ST  
N Vel  
*97  
*98  
*99  
*100  
09 33.0  
09 45.9  
09 47.2  
1008.5  
+51 41  
+2346  
-6505  
+11 58  
3.2v  
3.0v  
3.0v  
1.4v  
STAR F6 IV  
STAR G1 II  
8ST  
8ST  
9ST  
8ST  
Theta UMa  
1 Leo  
Nu Car AB  
Alpha Leo A  
Ras Elased Aus  
B=6.3  
Regulus  
50  
50  
STAR A5 Ib + B7 III  
STAR B7 Vn  
*101  
10 13.7  
-7002  
3.3v  
STAR B8 Illn  
8ST  
Omega Car  
*102  
*103  
*104  
*105  
1020.0  
1022.4  
1032.0  
1043.0  
+1951  
+41 30  
-61 42  
-6424  
2.6v  
3.1v  
3.3v  
2.8v  
STAR K1 1Mb Fe-0.5 + *  
STAR MO II Ip  
STAR B4 Vne  
9ST  
8ST  
8ST  
8ST  
Gamma Leo A  
Mu Uma  
Rho Car  
Algieba B=3.5 G7 III Fe-1  
Tania Australis  
HR4140  
STAR B0.5Vp  
Theta Car  
*106  
*107  
1046.8  
1049.7  
-4926  
-16 11  
20  
3
2.7v  
3.1v  
STAR G5 III + F8: V  
STAR K2 III  
9ST  
8ST  
Mu Vel AB  
Ny Hya  
B=6.4  
*108  
*109  
11 01.9  
11 03.8  
+5623  
+61 45  
2.4v  
1.8v  
STAR AOmA1 IV-V  
STAR KO Ilia + A8 V  
8ST  
9ST  
Beta UMa  
Alpha UMa AB  
Merak  
Dubhe B=4.8  
*110  
11 09.7  
+4430  
3.0v  
STAR K1 III  
8ST  
Psi UMa  
*111  
11 14.2  
+2032  
2.6v  
STAR A4 V  
8ST  
Delta Leo  
Zosma  
Chort  
*112  
*113  
*114  
*115  
11 14.2  
11 35.8  
11 49.1  
11 53.8  
+1526  
-6302  
+1434  
+5341  
3.3v  
3.1v  
2.1v  
2.4v  
STAR A2 Vs  
STAR B9 III  
8ST  
8ST  
8ST  
8ST  
Theta Leo  
Lambda Cen  
Beta Leo  
Gamma UMa  
STAR A3V  
STAR AO IV-Vn  
Denebola  
Phad  
*116  
*117  
1208.4  
-5044  
-2237  
2.5v  
3.0v  
STAR B2 IVne  
STAR K3 Ilia  
Delta Cen  
8ST  
8ST  
12 10.1  
Epsilon Crv  
Minkar  
*118  
*119  
12 15.1  
12 15.5  
-5845  
+5701  
2.8v  
3.3v  
STAR B2 IV  
STAR A2 IV-Vn  
Delta Cru  
Delta UMa  
8ST  
8ST  
Megrez  
*120  
12 15.8  
-1733  
2.6v  
STAR B8p III: (Hg+Mn)  
Gamma Crv  
8ST  
Gienah Ghurab  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 5  
STAR Catalog (continued)  
STAR#  
DEC  
SIZE  
MAG TYPE & DESCRIPTION  
ALT NAME  
RA  
Q TAGS  
COMMON NAME/COMMENTS  
*121  
1226.6  
-6306  
50  
1.3v  
STAR  
B0.5 IV + B1 Vn  
Alpha Cru A  
9
ST AcruxA B=1.7  
*122  
*123  
*124  
*125  
1226.7  
1229.9  
1231.2  
1234.4  
-6307  
-1631  
-5707  
-2324  
50  
240  
1.7v  
3.0v  
1.6v  
2.7v  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
B1 Vn + B0.5 IV  
B9.5 III + K2 V  
M3.5 III  
Alpha Cru B  
Delta Crv A  
Gamma Cru  
Beta Crv  
9
9
8
8
ST Acrux B A=1 .3  
ST Algorab B=8.3  
ST Gacrux  
ST Kraz  
G5II  
*126  
1237.2  
-6909  
2.7v  
STAR  
B2 IV-V  
Alpha Mus  
8
ST  
*127  
*128  
*129  
*130  
1241.6  
1241.5  
1241.7  
1246.2  
-4858  
-4858  
-01 28  
-6807  
50  
50  
40  
10  
2.9v  
3.0v  
2.8v  
3.1v  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
B9.5 III +AO III  
AO III + B9.5 III  
F1 V + F1 V  
Gamma Cen A  
Gamma Cen B  
Gamma Vir AB  
Beta Mus AB  
9
9
9
9
ST B=3.0  
ST A=2.9  
ST Porrima B=3.5  
ST B=4.1  
B2 V + B2.5 V  
*131  
1247.7  
-5942  
1.2v  
STAR  
B0.5 III  
Beta Cru  
8
ST Becrux Mimosa  
*132  
*133  
*134  
*135  
1254.0  
1256.1  
1302.2  
13 19.0  
+5558  
+38 19  
+1058  
-2311  
1.8v  
2.9v  
2.8v  
3.0v  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
AOp IV: (Cr+Eu)  
AOp III: (Si+Eu+Sr)  
G9 Illab  
Epsilon UMa  
AlphaA2 CVn A  
Epsilon Vir  
8
8
8
8
ST Alioth  
ST Cor Caroli B=5.6 FO V  
ST Vindamiatrix  
ST  
G8 Ilia  
Gamma Hya  
*136  
1320.6  
-3643  
2.8v  
STAR  
A2 V  
lota Cen  
8
ST  
*137  
*138  
*139  
*140  
1324.0  
1325.2  
1339.9  
1347.6  
+5455  
-11 10  
-5328  
+49 19  
140  
2.3v  
1.0v  
2.3v  
1.9v  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
A1p IV: (Si) +A1mA7  
Zeta UMa A  
Alpha Vir  
Epsilon Cen  
Eta UMa  
9
8
8
8
ST Mizar B=3.9  
ST Spica  
ST  
B1 V  
B1 III  
B3 V  
ST Alcaid  
*141  
1349.6  
-4228  
3.0v  
STAR  
B2 IV-Vpne  
Mu Cen  
8ST  
*142  
*143  
"144  
*145  
1354.7  
1355.6  
14 03.9  
1406.4  
+1824  
-4717  
-6024  
-2641  
2.7v  
2.6v  
0.6v  
3.3v  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
GO IV  
B2.5 IV  
B1 III  
Eta Boo  
8
8
8
8
ST Mufrid  
ST  
Zeta Cen  
Beta Cen AB  
Pi Hya  
ST Hadar  
ST  
K2 Illb  
*146  
1406.7  
-3622  
2.1v  
STAR  
KO Illb  
Theta Cen  
8
ST Menkent  
ST Arcturus  
*147  
*148  
*149  
*150  
14 15.7  
1432.1  
1435.5  
14 39.8  
+19 11  
+38 19  
-42 10  
-6051  
O.Ov  
3.0v  
2.4  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
K1.5 III Fe-0.5  
A7 III-IV  
Alpha Boo  
Gamma Boo  
Eta Cen  
8
8
ST  
ST  
Seginus  
B1.5 IVpne  
G2 V + K4 V  
8
210  
210  
O.Ov  
Alpha Cen A  
9ST  
Rigel Kentaurus B=1.3  
*151  
14 39.8  
-6051  
1.3v  
STAR  
K4 V + G2 V  
Alpha Cen B  
9
ST A=0.0  
•152  
*153  
*154  
*155  
1441.9  
1442.5  
1446.6  
1451.1  
-4724  
-6459  
+2704  
-51 03  
2.3v  
3.2v  
2.4v  
2.8v  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
B1.5 III  
Alpha Lup  
Alpha Cir  
8
9
9
8
ST  
160  
30  
A7p (Sr) + K5 V  
KO ll-lll +AO V  
A3 IV  
ST B=8.6  
ST Izar B=5.1  
ST Zuben Elgenubi  
Epsilon Boo  
Alpha Lib A  
*156  
14 50.6  
+74 10  
2.1v  
STAR  
K4III  
Beta UMi  
8
ST Kocab  
*157  
*158  
*159  
*160  
1458.5  
1459.2  
1504.1  
15 17.1  
-4308  
-4206  
-25 18  
-0923  
2.7v  
3.1v  
3.3v  
2.6v  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
B2 IV  
B2V  
Beta Lup  
Kappa Cen  
Sigma Lib  
Beta Lib  
8
8
8
8
ST  
ST  
M4 III  
B8 Vn  
ST  
ST  
Brachium  
Zuben Elschemali  
*161  
15 18.9  
1521.4  
-6841  
-4039  
2.9v  
3.2v  
STAR  
STAR  
A1 Illn  
Gamma TrA  
Delta Lup  
8
8
ST  
ST  
*162  
B1.5IVn  
*163  
*164  
*165  
1520.7  
1524.9  
1535.5  
+71 50  
+5858  
+2643  
3.1v  
3.3v  
2.2v  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
A2.5 III  
K2 III  
Gamma UMi  
lota Dra  
8
8
8
ST  
ST  
ST  
Pherkad  
Ed Asich  
Alphekka  
AO IV  
Gamma CrB  
*166  
*167  
1535.1  
1554.3  
-41 10  
+0625  
5
2.8v  
2.7v  
STAR  
STAR  
B2 IVn + B2 IVn  
K2 Illb (CN1)  
Alpha Lup AB  
Alpha Ser  
9
8
ST  
ST  
A=3.5 B=3.6  
Unukalhai  
*168  
*169  
1555.1  
1558.9  
1559.5  
-6326  
-2608  
+2554  
2.9v  
2.9v  
2.0v  
STAR  
STAR  
FO IV  
B1 V + B2 V  
Beta Tra  
Pi Sco A  
8
8
ST  
ST  
*170  
STAR  
gM3: + Bep  
TCrB  
8ST  
Gait  
*171  
1600.3  
-2238  
2.3v  
STAR  
B0.3 IV  
Delta Sco AB  
8
ST  
Dschubba  
*172  
*173  
*174  
*175  
1605.5  
16 14.3  
16 18.3  
1621.2  
-1948  
-0343  
-0436  
-2536  
10  
2.6v  
2.7v  
3.2v  
2.9v  
STAR B0.5 IV  
Beta Sco AB  
Delta Oph  
Epsilon Oph  
Sigma Sco A  
9ST  
8
Graffias B=5.0 C=4.9 @ 14"  
Yed Prior  
Yed Posterior  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
M0.5 III  
ST  
ST  
ST  
G9.5 Illb Fe-0.5  
B1 III + B9 V  
8
9
200  
Alniyat B=8.3  
*176  
1624.0  
+61 31  
60  
30  
2.7v  
STAR  
G8 Illab  
9
ST  
Eta Dra A  
B=8.7  
*177  
*178  
*179  
*180  
1629.5  
1630.2  
1635.9  
1637.2  
-2626  
+21 29  
-28 13  
-1034  
0.9v  
2.8v  
2.8v  
2.6v  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
M1.5 lab + B2.5V  
G7 Ilia  
Alpha Sco A  
Beta Her  
Tau Sco  
9
8
8
8
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
Antares B=5.4  
Kornephoros  
BO V  
O9.5 Vn  
Zeta Oph  
Fieht  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 6  
STAR Catalog (continued)  
STAR#  
*181  
DEC  
SIZE  
11  
MAG TYPE & DESCRIPTION  
ALT NAME  
Q TAGS  
9ST  
COMMON NAME/COMMENTS  
B=5.5  
RA  
1641.3  
+31 36  
2.8v  
STAR G1 IV + G7 V  
Zeta Her AB  
*182  
1648.7  
-6902  
1.9v  
STAR K2 lib - Ilia  
Alpha TrA  
8 ST  
Artia  
*183  
*184  
*185  
1650.2  
1651.9  
1657.7  
-34 17  
-3803  
+0922  
2.3v  
3.0v  
3.2v  
STAR K2 III  
STAR B1.5 IVn  
STAR K2 III  
Epsilon Sco  
8ST  
8 ST  
8ST  
MuA1 Sco  
Kappa Oph  
*186  
1658.7  
-5600  
3.1v  
STAR K4 III  
Zeta Ara  
8ST  
*187  
*188  
*189  
*190  
1708.7  
17 10.4  
17 12.2  
17 14.7  
+6543  
-1544  
-43 14  
+1423  
3.2v  
2.4v  
3.3v  
3.1v  
STAR B6 III  
Zeta Dra  
Eta Oph AB  
Eta Sco  
8ST  
9ST  
8ST  
8ST  
Aldhibah  
Sabik A=3.0 B=3.5  
10  
90  
STAR A2 Vs + AS V  
STAR F2p V: (Cr)  
STAR M5 Ib-ll  
Alpha HerAB  
Ras Algethi  
Sarin B=8.8  
*191  
17 15.1  
+2450  
3.1v  
STAR A1 IVn + ?  
Delta Her  
9ST  
*192  
*193  
17 15.1  
1722.1  
+3648  
-2500  
3.2v  
3.3v  
STAR K3 Nab  
STAR B2 IV  
Pi Her  
8ST  
8ST  
Alpha Oph  
*194  
*195  
1725.4  
1725.5  
-5532  
-5623  
2.9v  
3.3v  
STAR K3 Ib-lla  
STAR B1 Ib  
Beta Ara  
Gamma Ara A  
8 ST  
8ST  
*196  
1730.8  
-37 17  
2.7v  
STAR B2 IV  
Upsilon Sco  
8ST  
*197  
*198  
1730.4  
1731.9  
+52 19  
-4952  
40  
2.8v  
3.0v  
STAR G2 Ib-lla + ?  
STAR B2Vne  
Beta Dra A  
Alpha Ara  
9ST  
8ST  
Restaban B=11.5  
*199  
*200  
1733.7  
1725.0  
-3707  
+1233  
1.6v  
2.1v  
STAR B1.5 IV  
STAR A5 Illn  
Lambda Sco  
Alpha Oph  
8ST  
8ST  
Shaula  
Rasalhague  
*201  
1737.3  
-4300  
1.9v  
STAR F1 II  
Theta Sco  
8ST  
Sargas  
*202  
"203  
'204  
"205  
1742.6  
1743.5  
1747.6  
1749.9  
-3902  
+0434  
-4007  
-3702  
2.4v  
2.8v  
3.0  
STAR B1.5III  
STAR K2 III  
STAR F2 la  
STAR K2 III  
Kappa Sco  
Beta Oph  
lotaA1 Sco  
G Sco  
8ST  
8 ST  
8ST  
8 ST  
Cebalrai  
HR6630  
Etamin  
3.2v  
"206  
1756.6  
+51 29  
2.2v  
STAR K5 III  
STAR KO III  
STAR KO III  
Gamma Dra  
8 ST  
"207  
"208  
*209  
*210  
1759.1  
1805.8  
18 17.7  
1821.0  
-0946  
-3026  
-3646  
-2950  
3.3v  
3.0v  
3.1v  
2.7v  
Nu Oph  
8ST  
8ST  
9ST  
8ST  
GammaA2 Sgr  
Eta Sgr A  
Delta Sgr  
Nash  
B=8.3  
40  
STAR M3.5 Illab + G8: IV:  
STAR K2.5 Ilia  
*211  
1821.3  
1824.2  
-0254  
-3423  
3.3v  
1.9v  
STAR KO III-IV  
Eta Ser  
8ST  
8ST  
*212  
STAR AO Illnp (shell)  
Epsilon Sgr  
Kaus Australis  
*213  
*214  
*215  
1828.0  
1837.0  
1845.7  
-2525  
+3847  
-2659  
2.8v  
O.Ov  
3.2v  
STAR K1 1Mb  
STAR AOVa  
STAR B8.5 III  
Lambda Sgr  
Alpha Lyr  
8ST  
8ST  
8ST  
Kaus Borealis  
Vega  
Phi Sgr  
*216  
1855.3  
-26 18  
2.0v  
STAR B2.5V  
8ST  
Sigma Sgr  
Nunki  
*217  
*218  
*219  
*220  
1858.9  
1902.7  
1905.5  
1907.0  
+3241  
-29 53  
+1353  
-2739  
3.2v  
2.6v  
3.0v  
3.3v  
STAR B9 III  
8ST  
9ST  
8ST  
8ST  
Gamma Lyr  
Zeta Sgr AB  
Zeta Aql A  
Tau Sgr  
Sulaphat  
Ascella A=3.2 B=3.5  
5
6
STAR A2.5 V + A4: V:  
STAR AO IVnn  
STAR K1.5lllb  
*221  
1909.8  
-21 02  
2.9v  
STAR F2 II + ? + ?  
Pi Sgr ABC  
9ST  
Albaldah A=3.7  
B=3.8  
*222  
*223  
19 12.6  
1930.8  
+6739  
+2758  
3.1v  
3.1v  
STAR G9 III  
STAR K3 II + B9.5 V  
Delta Dra  
Beta Cyg A  
8ST  
9ST  
Nodus Secundus  
Albireo B=5.1  
B=6.4  
350  
20  
*224  
*225  
1945.0  
1946.3  
+4508  
+1037  
2.9v  
2.7v  
STAR B9.5 III + F1 V  
STAR K3 II  
Delta Cyg AB  
Gamma Aql  
9ST  
8ST  
Ta razed  
*226  
1950.8  
+0852  
0.8v  
STAR A7Vn  
Alpha Aql  
8ST  
Altair  
*227  
*228  
*229  
*230  
20 11.3  
2021.1  
20 22.2  
20 26.9  
-0050  
-1446  
+40 16  
+1505  
3.2v  
3.1v  
2.2v  
1.9v  
R B9.5 III  
STAR KO II + AS V:n  
STAR F8 Ib  
"
Theta Aql  
8 ST  
8ST  
8ST  
8ST  
Beta Cap A  
Gamma Cyg  
Alpha Pav  
Dabih  
Sadr  
Peacock  
STAR B2.5V  
*231  
20 37.6  
-47 18  
3.1v  
STAR KO III (Cn1)  
Alpha Ind  
8ST  
*232  
*233  
*234  
*235  
2041.5  
20 46.3  
21 13.0  
21 18.6  
+45 17  
+3358  
+30 13  
+6236  
1.3v  
2.5v  
3.2v  
2.4v  
STAR A2 la  
Alpha Cyg  
Epsilon Cyg  
Zeta Cyg  
8ST  
8ST  
8 ST  
8ST  
Deneb  
Cat  
STAR KO III  
STAR G8 Ilia Ba 0.6  
STAR A7 IV-V  
Alpha Cep  
Alderamin  
Alphirk  
*236  
21 28.7  
+7033  
3.2v  
STAR B1 III  
Beta Cep  
8ST  
*237  
*238  
*239  
*240  
21 31.6  
21 44.2  
21 47.1  
21 54.0  
-0535  
+0953  
-1607  
-3722  
2.9v  
2.4v  
2.9v  
3.0v  
STAR GO Ib  
STAR K2 Ib  
STAR A3mF2 V:  
STAR B8 III  
Beta Aqr  
8 ST  
8ST  
8ST  
8 ST  
Sadalsuud  
Enif 72 flare  
Epsilon Peg  
Delta Cap  
Gamma Gru  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
47  
STAR Catalog (continued)  
STAR#  
ALT NAME  
Alpha Aqr Alpha Gru 8 8 ST  
RA  
DEC  
SIZE  
MAG TYPE & DESCRIPTION  
Q TAGS  
COMMON NAME/COMMENTS  
G2 Ib B7 IV K3 III M5 III  
G8 II + FO V  
Sadalmelik Al Nair  
Matar  
*241  
*242  
*243 - 18.6 22  
244  
22 05.8 22 -00 19 -  
08.3 22 4658 -60  
16  
42.7  
2243.1  
3.0v  
1.7v  
2.9v  
2.1v  
2.9v  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
Alpha Tuc Beta Gru  
Eta Peg  
8 8 ST  
-
8
ST  
ST  
ST  
4652  
+30 14  
*245  
A3 IV  
A3 V  
M2 ll-III  
*246  
'247  
*248  
22 53.6 22 -1550 -  
3.3v  
1.2v  
2.4v  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
Delta Aqr Alpha PsA 8 8 ST Skat Fomalhaut Scheat  
57.7 23  
03.8  
2938  
+2805  
Beta Peg  
8
ST  
ST  
*249  
*250  
23 04.8  
23 39.4  
+15 12  
+77 38  
2.5v  
3.2v  
STAR  
STAR  
B9.5 V  
K1 III-IV  
Alpha Peg  
Gamma Cep  
8
8
ST  
ST  
Markab  
Alrai  
*251  
00 06.1  
+5826  
15  
6.4  
STAR  
6.4:7.2 @308  
ADS 61  
9
ST 1980=1.4 @287 107y  
*252  
*253  
*254  
00 40.0  
00 42.4  
00 49.9  
+21 27  
+0411  
+2742  
66  
15  
44  
5.5  
7.8  
6.3  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
5.5:8.7 @194  
7.8:9.4 @207  
6.3:6.3 @296  
ADS 558  
ADS 588  
ADS 683  
9ST  
9
9
1964 Yellow:Blue  
ST 1980=1.5 @ 200  
ST 1959 p(Yellow:Blue)  
3
'255  
00 54.6  
+19 11  
5
6.2  
STAR  
6.2:6.9 @211  
ADS 746  
9
ST 1980=0.5 @ 224 400y  
*256  
00 55.0  
01 05.7  
+2338  
8
6.0  
5.6  
STAR  
STAR  
6.0:6.4 O292  
5.6:5.8 @159  
ADS 755  
ADS 899  
9
9
ST 1980=0.6 @ 259  
ST 1964 Yellow:pBlue  
'257  
+21 28  
299  
'258  
"259  
01 09.5  
01 13.7  
+47 15  
+0735  
5
230  
4.6  
5.6  
STAR  
STAR  
4.6:5.5 @133  
5.6:6.6 @063  
ADS 940  
ADS 996  
9
9
ST 1980=0.5 @ 140  
ST 1972 Yellow:pBlue  
'260  
01 39.8  
-56 12  
113  
5.8  
STAR  
5.8:5.8 @193  
p Eri  
9
ST 1980=11.1 @195  
*261  
02 35.5  
+8935  
178  
2.0  
STAR  
2.0:8.9 @216  
ADS 1477  
9
ST  
Polaris North Star  
*262  
'263  
*264  
"265  
01 53.6  
01 55.9  
01 57.9  
02 02.0  
+19 18  
+01 51  
+2336  
+0246  
78  
4.6  
6.8  
4.7  
4.2  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
4.6:4.7 @000  
6.8:6.8 O057  
4.7:7.7 @047  
4.2:5.2 @273  
ADS 1507  
ADS 1538  
ADS 1563  
ADS 1615  
9
9
9
9
ST 1969 1831=8.6  
ST 1980=1.2 @053  
ST 1973 Yellow:Blue  
10  
385  
16  
ST  
pBlue:pGreen  
"266  
02 03.9  
+4220  
98  
2.2  
STAR  
2.2:5.1 @063  
ADS 1630  
9
ST  
1967 Orange:Emerald  
"267  
"268  
02 12.4  
02 14.0  
+30 18  
+4729  
39  
11  
5.3  
6.6  
STAR  
STAR  
5.3:6.9 @071  
6.6:7.1 @274  
ADS 1697  
ADS 1709  
9
9
ST  
ST  
1959 Yellow:Blue  
1980=1.1 @266  
*269  
"270  
02 29.1  
02 37.0  
+6725  
+2439  
25  
383  
4.6  
6.6  
STAR  
STAR  
4.6:6.9 @232  
6.6:7.4 @276  
ADS 1860  
ADS 1982  
9
9
ST 1980=2.4 @234  
ST 1973 Yellow:pBlue  
*271  
02 43.3  
+03 15  
28  
3.6  
STAR  
3.6:6.2 @297  
ADS 2080  
9
ST 1974 Yellow: Ashen  
*272  
*273  
*274  
*275  
03 14.1  
03 17.8  
03 35.0  
03 34.5  
+00 11  
+3838  
+6002  
+2428  
11  
8
8.8  
7.8  
6.8  
6.6  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
8.8:8.8 @139  
7.8:8.3 @259  
6.8:7.6 @261  
6.6:6.7 @002  
ADS 241 6  
ADS 2446  
ADS 261 2  
ADS 2616  
9
9
9
9
ST 1980=1.0 @144  
ST 1980=0.9 @265  
ST 1980=1.3 @258  
ST 1980=0.6 O006  
14  
7
*276  
03 50.3  
+2535  
4
5.8  
STAR  
5.8:6.2 @211  
ADS 2799  
9
ST 1980=0.6 @207  
"277  
'278  
*279  
*280  
03 54.3  
04 09.9  
04 07.5  
04 16.0  
-0257  
+8042  
+3805  
+31 42  
67  
7
16  
7
4.7  
5.5  
7.4  
8.0  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
4.7:6.2 @347  
5.5:6.3 O120  
7.4:8.9 @353  
8.0:8.1 @275  
ADS 2850  
ADS 2963  
ADS 2995  
ADS 3082  
9
9
9
9
ST Fixed  
ST 1980=0.8 @109  
ST 1980=1.4 @003  
ST 1980=0.8 O270  
*281  
*282  
04 20.4  
04 22.8  
+2721  
+1503  
496  
14  
5.1  
7.3  
STAR  
STAR  
5.1:8.5 @496  
ADS 31 37  
ADS 31 69  
9
9
ST 1973 Yel/Ora:Blue  
ST Purple:Blue  
7.3:8.5  
@352  
*283  
*284  
05 07.9  
05 14.5  
+0830  
-08 12  
7
92  
5.8  
0.2  
STAR  
STAR  
5.8:6.5 O349  
0.2:6.7 @206  
ADS 3711  
ADS 3823  
9
9
ST 1980=0.7 @021  
ST Rigel  
7
*285  
05 35.2  
+0956  
43  
3.6  
STAR  
3.6:5.5 @044  
ADS 41 79  
9
ST 1959 Yellow: Purple  
*286  
05 35.3  
-0523  
132  
5.1  
STAR  
5.4:6.8:6.8  
ADS 41 86  
9
ST Trapezium in M42  
*287  
*288  
06 28.8  
06 46.3  
-0702  
+5927  
99  
17  
4.6  
5.4  
STAR  
STAR  
4.6:5.1:5.4  
5.4:6.0 @074  
ADS 51 07  
ADS 5400  
9
9
ST Fixed White Stars  
ST 1980=1.7 @079  
*289  
*290  
06 45.3  
07 12.8  
-1642  
+27 14  
45  
13  
-1.5  
7.2  
STAR  
STAR  
@005  
7.2:7. @316  
ADS 4523  
ADS 5871  
9
9
ST 1980=10.3 @049  
ST 1980=1.3 @320 120y  
2
*291  
*292  
07 30.3  
07 34.6  
+4959  
8
8.8  
1.9  
STAR  
STAR  
8.8:8.8 @195  
1.9:2.9 @073  
ADS 6117  
ADS 6175  
9
9
ST 1980=0.8 @189  
+31 53  
30  
ST 1980=2.2 @095 420y  
*293  
*294  
08 12.2  
0921.1  
+1739  
+38 11  
6
11  
5.6  
6.5  
STAR  
STAR  
5.6:6.0 @182  
6.5:6.7 @271  
ADS 6650  
ADS 7307  
9
9
ST Yellow:Yellow:Blue  
ST 1980=1.1 @254  
*295  
10 16.3  
+1744  
14  
7.2  
STAR  
7.2:7.5 @181  
ADS 7704  
9
ST 1980=1.4 @183  
*296  
1020.0  
+1951  
44  
2.2  
STAR  
2.2:3.5 ©124  
ADS 7724  
9
ST 1980=4.3 @123  
*297  
*298  
*299  
*300  
11 18.3  
11 32.4  
12 16.1  
1224.4  
+31 32  
+61 05  
+4039  
+2535  
13  
6
115  
16  
4.3  
5.8  
5.9  
6.8  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
4.3:4.8 @060  
5.8:7.1 @295  
5.9:9.0 @260  
6.8:7.8 @325  
ADS 8119  
ADS 81 97  
ADS 8489  
ADS 8539  
9
9
9
9
ST 1980=2.9 @105  
ST 1980=0.4 @211  
ST 1925 Gold:Blue  
ST 1980=1.5 @326  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 8  
STAR Catalog (continued)  
STAR#  
*301  
DEC  
SIZE  
47  
MAG TYPE & DESCRIPTION  
ALT NAME  
Alpha Cru  
Q TAGS  
9ST  
COMMON NAME/COMMENTS  
1943 White:White  
RA  
1226.6  
-6306  
1.6  
STAR  
1.6:2.1 @114  
'302  
*303 1241.7  
*304  
*305  
1235.1  
+1822  
-01 28  
+21 15  
+5455  
202  
30  
8
5.2  
3.5  
5.1  
2.3  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
5.2:6. @271  
3.5:3. @287  
5.1:7. @194  
2.3:4. @151  
ADS 8600  
ADS 8630  
ADS 8695  
ADS 8891  
9 ST  
9ST  
9ST  
9ST  
1963 Yellow:vBlue  
1980=3.9 @297 White  
1980=0.8 @175  
1967  
1253.3  
1323.9  
144  
*306  
1349.1  
+26 59  
34  
7.6  
STAR  
7.6:8. @167  
ADS 9031  
9ST  
1980=3.4 @159  
*307  
*308  
*309  
*310  
14 15.3  
1420.4  
1440.0  
1441.2  
+0308  
+4830  
-6051  
12  
13  
7.8  
8.1  
0.0  
4.5  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
7.8:7. @239  
8.1:8. @105  
0.0:1.2 @214  
ADS 91 82  
ADS 9229  
Alpha Cen  
ADS 9343  
9ST  
9ST  
9ST  
9 ST  
1980=1.1 @252  
1980=1.2 O104 White  
1980=21.8 @209  
197  
10  
+1344  
@160  
1980=1.1 @305 White  
4.5:4.  
*311  
1445.0  
+2704  
28  
2.5  
STAR  
2.5:5. @339  
ADS 9372  
9ST  
1971 Orange:Green  
*312  
*313  
*314  
*315  
1451.4  
1451.4  
15 18.4  
1523.2  
+1906  
+4456  
+2650  
+30 17  
70  
11  
15  
10  
4.7  
8.4  
7.3  
5.6  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
4.7:6. @326  
8.4:8. @348  
7.3:7. @255  
5.6:5. @027  
ADS 941 3  
ADS 9418  
ADS 9578  
ADS 961 7  
9ST  
9ST  
9 ST  
9ST  
Orange:Blue  
1980=1.1 @346  
1980=1.4 @250  
1980=0.4 @321  
*316  
1524.5  
+3720  
22  
7.0  
STAR  
7.0:7. @012  
ADS 9626  
9ST  
1980=2.2 @016  
*317 1534.8  
+1032  
+3638  
-11 22  
+3351  
39  
63  
7
4.1  
5.1  
4.9  
5.6  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
4.1:5. @179  
5.1:6. @305  
4.9:4. @044  
5.6:6. @235  
ADS 9701  
ADS 9737  
ADS 9909  
ADS 9979  
9 ST  
9ST  
9ST  
9ST  
1960 Yel-Whi:Ashen  
1957  
1980=1.2 @021  
1980=6.7 @233  
*318  
*319  
*320  
1539.4  
1 6 04.4  
16 14.7  
69  
*321  
1629.4  
-2626  
24  
0.9v  
STAR  
0.9:5. @276  
ADS 10074  
9 ST  
Antares Red:pGreen  
*322  
*323  
*324  
*325  
1628.9  
1630.9  
1656.5  
1705.4  
+1824  
+01 59  
17  
15  
14  
19  
7.7  
4.2  
7.1  
5.7  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
7.7:7. @129  
4.2:5.2 @022  
7.1:7. @069  
5.7:5. @025  
ADS 10075  
ADS 10087  
ADS 10279  
ADS 10345  
9ST  
9ST  
9ST  
9 ST  
1980=1.4 @136  
1980=1.3 @ 013  
1980=1.3 @069  
1980=1.9 @042  
+6502  
+5428  
*326  
17 15.4  
-2635  
48  
5.1  
STAR  
5.1:5.1 @151  
ADS 10417  
9 ST  
Orange:0range  
*327  
*328  
17 14.7  
1723.7  
+1424  
+3708  
47  
40  
3.2  
4.6  
STAR  
STAR  
3.2:5. @107  
4.6:5. @316  
ADS 10418  
ADS 10526  
9ST  
9ST  
1968 Yellow:Blue  
1964  
*329 1801.5  
+21 36  
-08 11  
65  
18  
5.1  
5.2  
STAR  
STAR  
5.1:5. @258  
5.2:5.  
ADS 10993  
ADS 11005  
9 ST  
9ST  
1953 Yellow:pRed  
1980=1.9 @277  
*330  
1803.1  
@280  
*331  
1805.3  
+0232  
15  
4.2  
STAR  
4.2:6. @220  
ADS 11046  
9ST  
Yel-Ora:0ra  
*332  
*333  
*334  
*335  
1825.0  
1835.8  
1844.4  
1844.4  
+2724  
+1658  
+3940  
+3936  
7
6.5  
6.8  
5.0  
5.2  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
6.5:7. @126  
6.8:7. @155  
5.0:6.1 @353  
5.2:5. @080  
ADS 11334  
ADS 11483  
ADS 11635  
ADS 11635  
9 ST  
9ST  
9ST  
9ST  
1980=0.7 @129  
15  
26  
24  
1980=1.6 @161  
1980=2.7 @355 White  
1980=2.3 O084 White  
*336  
1857.1  
+3254  
10  
5.4  
STAR  
5.4:7. @021  
ADS 11871  
9ST  
1980=1.1 @051  
*337  
*338  
*339  
*340  
1906.4  
1926.5  
1930.7  
1945.5  
-3703  
+27 19  
+2758  
+3337  
13  
20  
4.8  
8.1  
3.2  
8.3  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
4.8:5.1 @109  
8.1:8. @292  
3.2:5. @054  
8.3:8. @349  
Gamma CrA  
ADS 12447  
ADS 12540  
ADS 12889  
9ST  
9ST  
9ST  
9 ST  
1980=1.5 @157  
1980=1.8 @293  
1967 Gold:Blue  
1980=2.0 @357  
344  
24  
*341  
2021.0  
-1446  
2050  
3.1  
STAR  
3.1:6. @267  
Beta Cap  
9ST  
Yellow:Blue  
*342  
*343  
20 46.6  
20 47.5  
+1608  
+3629  
98  
9
4.3  
4.9  
STAR  
STAR  
4.3:5. @268  
4.9:6.1 @011  
ADS 14279  
ADS 14296  
9ST  
9ST  
1967 Gold:Blue-Gre  
White:pBlue  
*344  
*345  
20 59.1  
21 02.3  
+04 18  
+07 11  
10  
28  
6.0  
7.3  
STAR  
STAR  
6.0:6. @285  
7.3:7. @217  
ADS 14499  
ADS 14556  
9ST  
9ST  
1980=1.1 @286  
1961  
*346  
*347  
21 06.7  
22 28.8  
+3842  
+00 15  
297  
19  
5.2  
4.3  
STAR  
STAR  
5.2:6. @148  
4.3:4. @207  
ADS 14636  
ADS 15971  
9ST  
9 ST  
1980=29.0 ©146  
pYellow:pBlue  
*348  
*349  
*350  
22 28.2  
22 33.0  
23 34.0  
+5742  
+6955  
+31 20  
33  
4
9.8  
6.5  
5.6  
STAR  
STAR  
STAR  
9.8:11. O132  
6.5:7. @094  
5.6:5. @280  
ADS 15972  
ADS 16057  
ADS 16836  
9ST  
9ST  
9ST  
1980=2.6 @176 Reds  
1980=0.5 @086  
4
1980=0.4 @267  
*351  
-8858  
STAR VAR 5.3-5.7 FOIII  
21 12.3  
5.5  
Sigma Oct  
8 ST  
S-Pole * Sigma Oct  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
49  
4. M (Messier) Catalog  
SIZE  
MAG  
TYPE & DESCRIPTION  
M#  
RA  
DEC  
+2201  
0050  
ALT NAME  
CNGC 1952  
GLOBCLUS sp=F4 GLOB CLUS CNGC 7089  
sp=F7 GLOB CLUS sp=GO GLOB CNGC 5272  
Q TAGS COMMON NAME/COMMENTS  
M 1 M 05 34.5  
2 M 3 21 33.5  
M 4 M 1342.3  
-
360 774 8.4 6.5v PLAN NEB EMIS SN REM  
972 1578 6.4v  
+2823 - 1044  
2631  
B 4 S T  
C 2 S T  
B 2 S T  
B 2 S T  
B2 ST  
M1 Crab Nebula 4kly M2 40kly M3  
35kly M4 14kly M5 26kly  
5.9v  
5.8v  
5
1623.7  
15 18.6  
CLUS sp=F6  
CNGC 6121  
CNGC 5904  
+0205  
M 6  
M 7  
1740.1  
1754.0  
-32 13 - 900 4800 4.2v  
OPEN CLUS sp=B4 OPEN CLUS CNGC 6405  
C 1 ST C M6 1500ly M7 SOOly  
1 ST  
3449  
3.3v  
sp=B5  
CNGC 6475  
M 8  
M 9  
M 10 1657.1  
1803.2  
17 19.2  
-2423  
-1831  
-0407  
5400  
5.2  
OPEN CLUS + ENEB sp=O5  
CNGC 6523  
B 6 S T  
M8 Lagoon Nebula 5100ly  
558  
906  
7.9v  
6.6v  
GLOB CLUS  
GLOBCLUS sp=G1  
CNGC 6333  
CNGC 6254  
D 2 ST  
D 2 S T  
M9  
M10 20kly  
M 11 1851.1  
-06 16  
840  
5.8v  
OPEN CLUS sp=B8  
CNGC 6705  
C 1 ST  
M11 Very rich 5600ly  
M 12 1647.2  
M 13 1641.7  
M 14 1737.6  
M 15 21 30.0  
-01 57  
+3627  
-03 17  
+12 10  
870  
996  
702  
738  
6.6v  
5.9v  
7.6v  
6.4v  
GLOB CLUS sp=F8  
GLOB CLUS sp=F6  
GLOB CLUS  
CNGC 6218  
CNGC 6205  
CNGC 6402  
CNGC 7078  
D 2 S T  
B 2 S T  
D 2 S T  
C 2 S T  
M12 24kly  
M13 Hercules Globular  
M14  
M15 X-Ray Source 34kly  
GLOBCLUS sp=F2  
M 16 18 18.8  
M 17 1820.8  
-1347  
-16 11  
2100  
2760  
6.0v  
6.0v  
OPEN CLUS + ENEB sp=O7  
DIFF ENEB + OPEN CLUS Hll  
CNGC 6611  
CNGC 661 8  
D6 ST  
B 6 S T  
M16 Eagle Nebula 5500ly  
M17 Omega/Swan/Horseshoe  
M 18 1820.0  
M 19 1702.6  
-1708  
-26 15  
540  
810  
6.9v  
7.2v  
OPEN CLUS  
GLOBCLUS OBLATE  
CNGC 661 3  
CNGC 6273  
D 1 ST  
D 2 S T  
M18  
M19 Oblate Shape Globular  
M20  
1802.3  
-2302  
1740  
6.3v  
DIFF ENEB + OPEN CLUS Hll  
CNGC 6514  
B 6 S T  
M20 Trifid Nebula 3500ly  
M21  
1804.6  
-2230  
780  
5.9v  
OPEN CLUS  
CNGC 6531  
D 1 ST  
M21  
M22  
M23  
M24  
1836.3  
1757.0  
1820.0  
-2356  
-1901  
-1826  
-19 14  
1440  
1620  
4800  
2400  
5.1v  
5.5v  
4.7  
GLOB CLUS sp=F7 , ,  
OPEN CLUS sp=B8  
OPEN CLUS  
CNGC 6656  
CNGC 6494  
CNGC 6630  
CNGC 6634  
C 2 S T  
D 1 ST  
M22 10kly  
M23 1400ly  
c 1  
C1  
T
M24 Best with large field  
M25 1C 4725 Sparse Cluster  
M 25 1833.5  
6.5  
OPEN CLUS SPARSE  
M26  
M27  
1845.4  
-0924  
900  
910  
8.0v  
7.6p  
OPEN CLUS  
PLAN NEB  
CNGC 6694  
CNGC 6853  
D 1 ST  
B 4 S T  
M26  
1959.6  
1824.6  
20 23.9 +3832  
+2243  
-2452  
M27 Dumbbell Nebula 3500ly  
M28  
M29  
M30  
672  
420  
660  
6.9v  
6.6v  
7.5v  
GLOB CLUS  
OPEN CLUS  
GLOB CLUS  
CNGC 6626  
CNGC 6913  
CNGC 7099  
D 2 S T  
D 1 ST  
D2S  
M28  
M29  
M30  
21 40.3  
-23 11  
M31  
00 42.8  
+41 17  
10680  
456  
3.5  
8.2  
GALAXY Sb l-ll  
GALAXY E2  
UGC 454  
UGC 452  
B 5 S T  
C 5 S T  
M31 Andromeda Gal 178x63  
M32 Comp of M31 7.6x5.8  
M32  
M33  
00 42.8  
01 33.9  
+4053  
+3040  
3720  
2100  
1680  
5.7  
5.2v  
5.1v  
GALAXY Sc ll-lll  
OPEN CLUS  
OPEN CLUS sp=B5  
UGC 1117  
CNGC 1039  
CNGC 2168  
C 5 S T  
C 1 ST  
C 1 ST  
M33 Triangulum Gal 62x39  
M34  
M35 2800ly  
M 34 02 42.0 +4247  
M35  
06 08.9  
+2421  
+3408  
+3233  
M36  
05 36.2  
720  
6.0v  
5.6v  
OPEN CLUS  
CNGC 1960  
CNGC 2099  
C 1 ST  
C 1 ST  
M36  
M37  
M38  
M39  
05 52.4  
05 28.7  
21 32.2  
1440  
OPEN CLUS sp=B8  
M37 4200ly  
+3551  
+4826  
+2559  
1260  
1920  
972  
6.4v  
4.6v  
9.6  
OPEN CLUS sp=B5  
OPEN CLUS  
GALAXY Sb I: + 3-SYS FNT  
CNGC 1912  
CNGC 7092  
UGC 7772  
C1 ST  
D 1 ST  
BAST  
M38 4600ly  
M39  
M40 16.2x2.8 Edge-On Lane  
M 40 1236.4  
M41  
M42  
0647.1  
-2045  
2280  
4.5v  
OPEN CLUS sp=B4  
CNGC 2287  
C 1 ST  
M41 2200ly  
05 35.3 -0523  
3960  
1200  
3.9  
5.8  
DIFF RNEB + ENEB  
DIFFRNEB + ENEB  
CNGC 1976  
CNGC 1982  
A 3 S T  
C3ST  
M42 Orion Nebula Blue+Red  
M43 Orion Nebula Extension  
M 43 05 35.5  
-05 16  
+19 59  
+2407  
M44  
M45  
08 40.1  
0347.1  
5700  
7200  
3.1v  
1.6  
OPEN CLUS sp=AO  
CNGC 2632  
CNGC 1457  
C1 ST  
c 6 S T  
M44 Praesepe/Beehive 590ly  
M45 Pleiades 410ly  
OPEN CLUS + RNEB sp=B6  
M46  
M47  
07 41 .9  
-1449  
1620  
6.1v  
4.4v  
OPEN CLUS sp=B8  
CNGC 2437  
CNGC 2422  
C 1 ST  
D 1 ST  
M46 5400ly (+CNGC 2438 PN)  
07 36.6 -1429  
1800  
OPEN CLUS sp=B3  
M47 1600ly  
M48  
M49  
08 13.7  
1229.8  
-0547  
+0800  
-0820  
3240  
534  
5.8v  
8.4  
5.9v  
OPEN CLUS  
GALAXY E4  
CNGC 2548  
UGC 7629  
D 1 ST  
C 5 S T  
M48  
M49 8.9x7.4  
M50  
07 02.9  
960  
OPEN CLUS  
CNGC 2323  
D 1 ST  
M50  
M51  
1330.0  
+47 11  
660  
8.4  
GALAXY Sc I 2-SYS FACE  
UGC 8493  
BAST  
M51 11.0x7.8 Whirlpool Gal  
M52  
M53  
M54  
M55  
23 24.2  
13 13.0  
1855.2  
1940.1  
+61 36  
+18 10  
780  
756  
546  
1140  
6.9v  
7.7v  
7.7v  
7.0  
OPEN CLUS  
GLOB CLUS  
CNGC 7654  
CNGC 5024  
CNGC 67.1 5  
CNGC 6809  
D 1 ST  
D 2 S T  
D 2 S T  
D2 ST  
M52  
M53  
-3028  
-3056  
GLOB CLUS  
GLOB CLUS sp=F5  
M54  
M55 20kly  
M 56 19 16.6  
M57  
M 58 12 37.8  
M59 1242.1  
M 60 1243.7  
+30 10  
+3302  
426  
150  
8.3v  
9.7p  
GLOB CLUS  
CNGC 6779  
CNGC 6720  
D 2ST  
B4ST  
M56  
1853.5  
PLAN NEB RING-LIKE  
M57 Ring Nebula 5kly  
+11 49  
+11 38  
+11 33  
324  
306  
432  
9.8  
9.8  
8.8  
GALAXY Sb  
GALAXY E3  
GALAXY E1  
UGC 7796  
UGC 7858  
UGC 7898  
C 5 S T  
D 5 S T  
D 5 S T  
M58 5.4x4.4 Near CNGC 4621  
M59 5.1x3.4 Near CNGC 4579  
M60 7.2x6.2 Near CNGC 4621  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 0  
M (Messier) Catalog (continued)  
SIZE  
360  
MAG  
9.7  
TYPE & DESCRIPTION  
GALAXY Sc I 2-SYS  
M#  
RA  
DEC  
+0428  
ALT NAME  
Q TAGS COMMON NAME/COMMENTS  
M 61 1222.0  
UGC 7420  
D A S T  
M61 6.0x5.5 Face-On  
M62  
1701.3  
-3007  
846  
6.6v  
GLOBCLUS OBLATE  
CNGC 6266  
D 2 S T  
M62 Non-symmetrical  
M 63  
M64  
13 15.8  
1256.7  
+42 02  
+21 41  
738  
558  
8.6  
8.5  
GALAXY Sb+ II  
GALAXY Sb-  
UGC 8334  
UGC 8062  
C 5 S T  
C 5 S T  
M63 12.3x7.6 Sunflower Gal  
M64 9.3x5.4 Black Eye Gal  
M65  
11 18.9  
+1305  
600  
522  
1800  
9.3  
GALAXY Sb II:  
UGC 6328  
UGC 6346  
CNGC 2682  
C 5 S T  
C 5 S T  
D 1 ST  
M65 10.0x3.3 Near M66  
M66 8.7x4.4 Near M65  
M67 Very old 2700ly  
M 66 11 20.2 +1259  
9.0  
GALAXY Sb+ II:  
OPEN CLUS sp=F2  
M 67 0851.1  
M 68 1239.4  
M 69 18 31.4 -3221  
+11 49  
6.9v  
-2646  
720  
426  
468  
8.2v  
7.7v  
8.1v  
GLOB CLUS  
GLOB CLUS  
GLOB CLUS  
CNGC 4590  
CNGC 6637  
CNGC 6681  
D 2 S T  
D 2 S T  
D2 ST  
M68  
M69  
M70  
M 70 1843.2  
-32 18  
M71  
1953.7  
20 53.5  
+1847  
-1233  
432  
8.3v  
GLOB CLUS  
CNGC 6838  
D2 ST  
M71  
M72  
M73  
354  
168  
9.4v  
8.9p  
GLOB CLUS  
OPEN CLUS  
CNGC 6981  
CNGC 6994  
D 2 S T  
D 1 ST  
M72  
M73  
20 59.0 -1237  
M 74 01 36.7 +1547  
612  
360  
9.2  
8.6v  
GALAXY Sc I  
GLOB CLUS  
UGC 1149  
CNGC 6864  
D 5 S T  
D 2 S T  
M74 10.2x9.5  
M75  
M75  
20 06.2  
-21 55  
M 76 01 42.0  
M 77 02 42.7  
+51 34  
290  
414  
12.2  
8.8  
PLAN NEB PART OF 0651  
GALAXY Sbp SEYFERT  
CNGC 0650  
UGC 21 88  
C 4 S T  
D5 ST  
M76 Little Dumbbell Nebula  
M77 6.9x5.9 Seyfert Galaxy  
-0001  
M 78 05 46.8 +0003  
480  
522  
534  
11.3  
8.0v  
7.2v  
DIFFRNEB  
GLOB CLUS  
GLOB CLUS  
CNGC 2068  
CNGC 1904  
CNGC 6093  
C 3 S T  
D2 ST  
D 2 S T  
M78 Blue 1500ly  
M79  
M80  
M79  
05 24.2 -2431  
16 17.1 -2300  
'••-.••  
M 80  
M 81 09 55.7 +6904  
1542  
672  
6.9  
8.4  
GALAXY Sb l-ll  
CNGC 3031  
UGC 5322  
C 5 S T  
C 5 S T  
M81 25.7x14.1 NearM82  
M82 11.2x4.6 Exploding  
M82  
09 55.9  
+6941  
GALAXY P EDGE-ON  
M83  
M84  
M 85 1225.5  
1337.1  
1225.1  
-2951  
+1253  
+18 11  
672  
300  
426  
8.2  
9.3  
9.2  
GALAXY Sc l-ll FACE-ON  
GALAXY E1  
GALAXY Ep 2-SYS  
CNGC 5236  
UGC 7494  
UGC 7508  
B 5 S T  
C 5 S T  
C A S T  
M83 11.2x10.2  
M84 5.0x4.4 Near M86  
M85 7.1x5.2  
M 86 1226.3  
+1256  
444  
9.2  
GALAXY E3  
UGC 7532  
C 5 S T  
M86 7.4x5.5  
M87  
M88  
M89  
M90  
1230.9  
1232.1  
1235.7  
1236.9  
+1223  
+1425  
+1233  
+1309  
432  
414  
252  
570  
8.6  
9.5  
9.8  
9.5  
GALAXY E1 + EO 2-SYS  
UGC 7654  
UGC 7675  
UGC 7760  
UGC 7786  
DAST  
D 5 S T  
D 5 S T  
C 5 S T  
M87 7.2x6.8 + CNGC 4471  
M88 6.9x3.9  
M89 4.2x4.2  
GALAXY Sb+ I MULTI-ARM  
GALAXY EO  
GALAXY Sb+  
M90 9.5x4.7  
M91  
1235.5  
17 17.2  
+1429  
+4309  
324  
672  
10.2  
6.5v  
GALAXY SBb + Sc 2-SYS  
GLOB CLUS sp=F1  
UGC 7753  
DAST  
D2 ST  
M91 5.4x4.4 Near CNGC 4571  
M92 X-Ray Source 26kly  
M 92  
M93  
M 94 1250.9  
CNGC 6341  
07 44.6 -2352  
1320  
660  
6.2v  
8.2  
OPEN CLUS + DNEB  
GALAXY Sb-p II:  
CNGC 2447  
UGC 7996  
D 6 S T  
C 5 S T  
M93 Includes dark nebula  
M94 11.0x9.1  
+41 08  
M95  
1043.9  
+11 42  
444  
9.7  
GALAXY S(B)b II  
UGC 5850  
C 5 S T  
M95 7.4x5.1 Near M96  
M96  
1046.7  
+11 49  
426  
9.2  
GALAXY Sbp  
UGC 5882  
C 5 S T  
M96 7.1x5.1 NearM95  
M 97  
M 98  
M99  
11 14.8  
12 13.9  
12 18.9  
+5502  
+1454  
+1425  
+1549  
194  
570  
324  
414  
12.0p  
10.1  
9.8  
PLAN NEB  
CNGC 3587  
UGC 7231  
UGC 7345  
UGC 7450  
C 4 S T  
D A S T  
D 5 S T  
D 5 S T  
M97 Owl Nebula 12kly  
M98 9.5x3.2  
M99 5.4x4.8  
GALAXY Sb l-ll: 3-SYS  
GALAXY Scl NEAR FACE-ON  
GALAXY Sc I FACE-ON  
M100 1223.0  
9.4  
M100 6.9x6.2 Brite Nucleus  
M101  
14 03.3  
+5421  
+5545  
1614  
312  
7.7  
GALAXY Sc I FACE-ON  
GALAXY E6p 2-SYS  
UGC 8981  
UGC 9723  
C5S  
M101 26.9x26.3 Pinwheel  
M102 5.2x2.3  
M102 1506.5  
10.0  
D A S T  
M103 01 33.3  
M104 1239.9  
M105 1047.8  
+6043  
-11 38  
+1235  
360  
534  
270  
7.4v  
8.3  
OPEN CLUS  
GALAXY Sb-  
CNGC 0581  
CNGC 4594  
UGC 5902  
D 1 ST  
C 5 S T  
C A S T  
M103  
M104 8.9x4.1 "Sombrero"  
9.3  
GALAXY E1 2-SYS  
M105 4.5x4.0  
M106 12 19.0  
+47 18  
1092  
8.3  
GALAXY Sb+p  
UGC 7353  
C 5 S T  
M106 18.2x7.9  
M107 1632.5  
M108 11 11.6  
M109 11 57.6 +5322  
M110 00 40.4  
-1302  
+5541  
600  
498  
456  
8.1v  
10.1  
9.8  
GLOBCLUS  
GALAXY Sc NEAR EDGE-ON  
GALAXY S(B)b+ I  
CNGC 6171  
UGC 6225  
UGC 6937  
D2 ST  
C 5 S T  
D 5 S T  
M107  
M108 8.3x2.5 Near M97  
M109 7.6x4.9  
+41 42  
1044  
8.0  
GALAXY E6:  
UGC 426  
C 5 S T  
M110 CompofM31 17.4x9.8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
51  
some small particles on the inside or outside of telescope optics.  
Should the optics get more dust on them than you would care for,  
simply use a photographic grade camel hair brush with very gentle  
strokes. You can also blow off dust with an ear syringe (available  
from a local pharmacy).  
APPENDIX E: MAINTAINING YOUR LX200  
1. Keeping Your Telescope Clean  
Prevention is the best recommendation that a telescope owner  
can follow to keep astronomical equipment in top working order.  
Proper measures taken during observation and when storing  
equipment between observing runs can add many years of trouble  
free use.  
There is a point, however, when the optics must be cleaned. This  
is when you can easily tell that there is  
a
thin layer of fine  
particulates that make the optics look very slightly hazy. To clean  
the optics we must suggest that you make your own lens cleaning  
solutions, since it is impossible to know all of the ingredients used  
in commercial lens cleaners. Pure isopropyl alcohol (90% or better)  
will clean most residual film build-up on optical surfaces (and metal  
surfaces too).  
Dust and moisture are the two main enemies to your instrument.  
When observing, it is advisable to use a proper fitting dew shield.  
The dew shield not only prevents dew from forming, and dust from  
settling on the corrector plate lens, it prevents stray light from  
reducing image contrast.  
Organic materials (e.g., fingerprints) on the front lens may be  
removed with a solution of 3 parts distilled water to 1 part isopropyl  
alcohol. A single drop of biodegradable dishwashing soap may be  
added per pint of solution. Use soft, white facial tissues and make  
short, gentle strokes. Change tissues often.  
Although dew shields go a long way to prevent moisture buildup,  
there can be times when the telescope optics will have a uniform  
coating of moist dew. This is not particularly harmful, as long as  
the instrument is allowed to let the dew evaporate. This can be  
done with a hair dryer, or just setting up the telescope indoors with  
the dust covers removed. It is also advisable that you let the foam  
lined case for the LX200 dry out indoors for a day if the night was  
moist. Packing your telescope away in a moist case can result in  
giving it a steam bath later.  
Sprayer bottles are a convenient dispenser of lens cleaning  
solutions onto the tissues. Use soft, white facial tissues and make  
short, gentle strokes. Change tissues often. If the optics are small  
(such as viewfinders or eyepieces), the tissue can be rolled to the  
appropriate thickness and then broken in half to create two  
cleaning wands. It is advised that you avoid many of the so-called  
lens cleaning papers (many which contain fiberglass), lens cloths,  
or chamois.  
Before attempting to clean an optical surface with a liquid solution,  
it is very important that as much dust as possible is removed by  
using forced air and/or gentle strokes with a photographic grade  
camel hair brush. The forced air can come from a rubber ear  
syringe, or canned compressed air from a photographic supply  
store. Be sure to hold the canned air in a vertical position and try  
spraying compressed air on your hand before aiming at the optics  
to see if any of the propellent (solid material) comes out. Propellant  
is very difficult to remove from optics, so take care not to tip the  
can when using it. If you have access to a compressor hose, be  
sure that it is filtered to prevent oil from being sprayed on the  
optics.  
If you live in a very moist climate, you may find it necessary to use  
silica desiccant stored in the telescope's case to ward off moisture  
and the possibility of fungus growing on and within the coatings of  
the optics. Replace the desiccant as often as necessary.  
Those living in coastal areas or tropic zones should also cover the  
electronic ports on the power panel and the keypad with gaffers  
tape to reduce corrosion on the metal contacts. Apply a dab of a  
water displacement solution (i.e. WD-40) with a small brush on all  
interior metal contacts and the input cord metal contacts. The  
keypad and all separate accessories should be kept in sealable  
plastic bags with silica desiccant.  
Once you are confident that you have removed most of the dust  
and large particles, begin cleaning with the mixture described  
above. Pour or spray enough solution onto a pillow or wand of  
tissue until it is quite wet. If you are cleaning a corrector plate, use  
radial strokes with a smooth pillow of tissue, starting from the  
center out, using no pressure. If you are cleaning small optical  
surfaces, use the rolled wands of tissue starting from the edges  
then spiraling in to the center, again using no pressure. Never pour  
or spray the solution onto the corrector plate or eyepieces  
themselves, as the liquid may go behind or in between lenses,  
where it is difficult or impossible to reach. Never attempt to  
disassemble an eyepiece to clean the inner elements, as you will  
certainly not be able to properly center and re-assemble the  
optical train.  
A thick layer of dust will attract and absorb moisture on all  
exposed surfaces. Left unattended, it can cause damaging  
corrosion. To keep dust at bay when observing, the telescope can  
be set up on a small section of indoor/outdoor carpet. If you are  
observing for more than one night in a row, the telescope can be  
left set up but covered with a large plastic bag (such as the one  
supplied with the telescope). The rear cell opening of the LX200  
can also be sealed off to the elements by threading on the optional  
accessory Skylight 1A Dust Seal. Eyepieces, diagonals, and other  
accessories are best kept in plastic bags and stored in cases,  
such as the Meade #50 Accessory Case.  
Use dry tissue to make the final clean up, again using no pressure.  
If there is still some sort of residue, repeat the procedure using the  
three part formula described above, again using the same  
cleaning techniques.  
All of the non optical surfaces of the LX200 should be cleaned  
routinely with a soft rag and alcohol to prevent corrosion. The cast  
metal surfaces and the individual exposed screws can also be kept  
looking new and corrosion free by wiping them down with a water  
displacement solution. Take care not to smear the solution onto  
any optical surface, and to wipe up any excess solution with a  
clean dry cloth. The painted tube can be polished with a liquid car  
polish and a soft rag.  
The inside surface of the corrector plate and secondary mirror  
may at some point become dirty due to particles falling inside the  
tube when removing or replacing the rear dust cover or threading  
on accessories. To reduce the chance of interior contamination,  
the Meade Skylight 1A Dust Seal is very effective. If the Dust Seal  
is not used, it helps to have the rear cell pointed downward when  
replacing the rear dust cover or attaching accessories.  
Surprisingly, the most common telescope maintenance  
error is cleaning the optics too often. A little dust on any of  
the optical surfaces causes virtually zero degradation of optical  
performance. It should be of no concern whatsoever to see  
Another more serious, but not damaging problem is the possibility  
of a hazy (usually uneven) film building up on the inside of the  
corrector plate. This can be caused by  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
52  
environmental pollutants, or temperature changes reacting with  
the interior paint, causing outgassing or water condensation, or  
combinations thereof.  
2. Collimation of the Optical System  
The optical Collimation (alignment) of any astronomical  
telescope used for serious purposes is important, but in cases of  
the Schmidt-Cassegrain design of the 8", 10", and 12" LX200,  
such Collimation is absolutely essential for good performance.  
Take special care to read and understand this section well so that  
your LX200 will give you the best optical performance.  
It is possible to clean the interior of the optical system yourself or  
to have it done professionally. In the case of the former, take great  
care in handling the optics. Any impact or rough handling can  
damage the surfaces, which may require complete optical  
replacement at Meade Instruments at substantial cost. Meade  
Instruments assumes no liability for damage incurred to the  
telescope by the customer.  
NOTE: The 7" LX200 does not require Collimation.  
For final optical tests, every Meade Schmidt-Cassegrain is  
precisely collimated at the factory before shipment. Our company  
is well aware that through shipment and normal handling, the  
optical alignment can be degraded. The design of the optical  
support system make the method of Collimation easy to do. Even  
the uninitiated can make an alignment of the optics to the same  
high precision that is performed at the Meade Instruments Optical  
Laboratories.  
The cleaning techniques described above are used while cleaning  
the interior of the optical system, with one exception: Do not  
apply cleaning solutions to the front surface mirrored  
optics. Only use the soft camel hair brush and the suggested  
ear syringe for removing particles. The corrector plate can be  
cleaned in the normal manner.  
To remove the corrector plate, follow the instructions below:  
To check the Collimation of your LX200, center a bright star that is  
overhead, or use a reflected "hot spot" of reflected sunlight from a  
chrome car bumper or a telephone pole insulator, with the supplied  
26mm eyepiece. To make a correct evaluation of the alignment it  
helps if the telescope has been allowed to either cool down or  
warm up to the ambient temperature where the instrument is set  
up. Temperature differences between the optics and the outside  
air can cause distortion in the images.  
a.  
Remove the six (8" and 12" models) or the eight (10" model)  
stainless steel screws that hold the corrector plate retaining  
ring with the raised white lettering in place. This should be  
done with the Drive Base placed flat on a work bench, and  
the optical tube assembly pointed up at a 45-degree angle  
with the declination lock secure to prevent accidental  
dislodging of the corrector plate.  
b.  
Remove the plastic retaining ring and locate the two white  
alignment marks, one at the edge of the corrector plate lens  
and one beside it on the black metal front cell. These two  
marks line up and serve as the precise rotational position of  
the corrector plate in the optical train. If no marks exist, make  
them yourself with a small paintbrush and some white paint,  
so that when you return the corrector plate to the front cell  
you are putting it back in the same position that you took it  
off.  
With the star or hot spot centered, de-focus the image. You will  
notice that the out of focus star image looks like a ring of light (the  
dark center of the ring is the shadow of the secondary mirror). Turn  
the focus knob until the ring of light fills about 1/8th of the eyepiece  
field. Take note that if you keep de-focusing the star past about  
1/8th of a field, that the ring will look perfectly concentric (even on  
all sides) even if the optics are out of alignment, thus preventing  
you from seeing any misalignments. If the ring of light does not  
seem to be even on all sides, or if the dark center seems to be  
offset in the in the ring of light, follow the method below:  
c.  
d.  
Remove the corrector plate from the telescope, holding it by  
the plastic central secondary housing. Gently flip it over so  
that the secondary mirror is facing you, then reinsert the  
corrector plate back into the front cell. This will allow you full  
access to clean the interior optical surfaces without touching  
them with your fingers.  
a.  
To make Collimation easy, the only adjustments possible on  
the 8", 10", and 12" LX200 come from the three set screws (1,  
2, and 3, Fig.26) located at the edge of the outer surface of  
the secondary mirror housing.  
When cleaning is complete, replace the corrector plate in it's  
original position, carefully lining up the rotational index  
marks described in paragraph b, above. Then replace the  
retainer. Partially thread in all of the stainless steel screws,  
then, one at a time, snug the screws down to prevent the  
corrector plate from rotating in the front cell. Take care not to  
overtighten the screws as it will stress the corrector plate  
lens.  
e.  
A final check of the optical system is to inspect for proper  
Collimation (alignment) of the optics.  
b.  
While looking at the de-focused star image and noticing  
which direction the darker shadow is offset in the ring of light  
or noticing which part of the ring is the thinnest (1, Fig. 27),  
place your index finger in front of the telescope so that it  
touches one of the Collimation set screws. You will see the  
shadow of your finger in the ring of light. Move your finger (or  
an assistants finger) around the edge of the black plastic  
secondary mirror support until you see the shadow of the  
finger crossing the thinnest part of the ring of light. At this  
point, look at the front of the telescope where your (or your  
assistants) finger is aiming. It will either be pointing directly  
at a set screw, or it will be between two set screws aiming at  
the set screw on the far side of the black plastic secondary  
mirror support. This is the set screw that you will adjust.  
c.  
Using the telescope's slow motion controls, move the de-  
focused image to the edge of the eyepiece field of view (2,  
Fig. 27), in the same direction as the darker shadow is offset  
in the ring of light.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
53  
d. Turn the set screw that you found with the pointing exercise  
while looking in the eyepiece. You will notice that the star  
image will move across the field. If while turning, the out-of-  
focus star image flies out of the eyepiece field, then you are  
turning the screw the wrong way. Turn the opposite direction  
and bring the image to the center of the field.  
standard 1.0 amp slow-blow fuse (2, Fig. 28). The long-life lithium  
battery (Panasonic CR2032 3 vDC or Duracell DL2032B) is  
stored behind the front panel of the Drive Base. The battery does  
have to be changed every few years, and is done by unthreading  
the four phillips-head screws that secure the Front Panel to the  
Drive Base. Then with a thin flat-head screw driver, lift the small  
coin-size battery out of its holder. The new battery simply slides in  
place.  
e. If while turning, you feel the screw get very loose, tighten the  
other two screws by even amounts. If while turning, the set  
screw gets too tight, unthread the other two by even  
amounts.  
The 1.0 amp slow-blow fuse will sacrifice itself to protect the  
LX200 electronics in the event that the telescope is prevented from  
completing a GO TO function (e.g., the tube runs into something  
that keeps it from slewing).  
f.  
When you bring the image to center (3, Fig. 27), carefully  
examine the evenness of the ring of light (concentricity). If  
you find that the dark center is still off in the same direction,  
continue to make the adjustment in the original turning  
direction. If it is now off in the opposite direction, you have  
turned too far and you need to turn in the opposite direction.  
Always double check the image in the center of the field of  
the eyepiece.  
g. You may find after your initial adjustment that the dark center  
is off in a new direction (e.g., instead of side-to-side, it is off  
in an up-and-down direction). If this is the case follow steps  
b through f as described above to find the new adjustment  
screw.  
h.  
Now try a higher power (e.g., 9mm or less) eyepiece and  
repeat the above tests. Any lack of Collimation at this point  
will require only very slight adjustments of the 3 set screws.  
You now have a good Collimation.  
5. Factory Servicing and Repairs  
Meade LX200 models have been designed and manufactured for  
years of trouble-free operation and repairs should rarely be  
i.  
As a final check on alignment, examine the star image in-  
focus with the higher power eyepiece as suggested above,  
under good seeing conditions (e.g., steady atmospheric  
conditions). The star point should appear as a small central  
necessary. If  
a
problem does occur, first write or call our  
Customer Service Department. Do not return the telescope until  
you have communicated with us in this way, since the great  
majority of problems can be handled without the return of the  
telescope to us. However, should the occasion arise that the  
dot (the so-called "Airy disc") with  
surrounding it. To give a final precision Collimation, make  
extremely slight adjustments of the set screws, if  
a
diffraction ring  
3
instrument requires factory servicing,  
Customer Service Representative will issue  
a
Meade Instruments  
Return Goods  
necessary, to center the Airy disc in the diffraction ring. You  
now have the best alignment of the optics possible.  
a
Authorization (RGA) number and give you full instructions on how  
to use it. Product returned without the RGA number may greatly  
delay any servicing or repairs. When telephoning or writing, please  
explain the exact nature of the problem so that we may offer a  
prompt remedial procedure. Be sure to include your full name,  
address, phone and fax numbers where you can be reached.  
3. Right Ascension Lock  
After a period of time, it is possible that the R.A. lock (7, Fig. 1) of  
the LX200 will not tighten sufficiently due to internal wear of the  
clutch mechanism. In such an event, remove the R.A. lock lever  
using one of the hex wrenches supplied with the telescope. Then,  
with a pair of pliers, tighten the shaft protruding outward from the  
drive base until you cannot easily rotate the fork arm in R.A. (Take  
care in this operation not to damage the cosmetic finish of your  
LX200). Replace the R.A. lock lever so that the handle points  
straight out from the crossbar connecting the fork arm.  
Should you live outside of the United States, contact your  
Authorized Meade Distributor.  
You can reach the Meade Instruments Customer Service  
Department either by mail, phone, or fax at: Meade Instruments  
Corporation, 6001 Oak Canyon, Irvine, CA 92620-4205,  
telephone (949) 451-1450, or fax (949) 451-1460. Outside of the  
U.S.A., dial your International Access Code, then 1, then the ten  
digit number above in the 949 area code. Customer Service hours  
are 8:30 AM to 4:30 PM, Pacific Time, Monday through Friday.  
4. Behind the Power Panel  
The LX200 power panel houses the back-up replaceable battery  
(1, Fig. 28) for the clock and calendar and a replaceable  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 4  
APPENDIX F: LX200  
PERSONAL COMPUTER CONTROL  
Remote operation of a computerized telescope has only been a  
fanciful dream for most amateur astronomers. The realization of  
fully controlling a telescope through a personal computer has  
previously been  
a
staggering proposition involving high  
monetary cost and expert knowledge of software and hardware.  
The LX200's internal software supports the RS-232 interface,  
requiring only a serial communication program such as Procomm.  
With a serial communication program, you can use the individual  
commands from the LX200 Command Set to simulate keypad  
control functions of the LX200. Every LX200 command and mode  
is available to explore the Object Library, to adjust slewing speeds,  
or to adjust focus with the optional #1206 Electric Focuser, just to  
name a few, with a simple RS-232 line connection to virtually any  
computer.  
If you are not a professional programmer, but wish to explore  
remote operation of the LX200 with your computer, there are after-  
market software programs available specifically for the LX200,  
including AstroSearch from Meade Instruments Corp.  
10 CLS  
What follows is a schematic for constructing your own RS-232  
cable, a program to test the RS-232 communication line called  
LX200 TEST, the LX200 Command Set, and LX200 DEMO, which  
is a program that you can enter into your computer to access the  
Object Library, slew to the object, and center the image.  
20 DEFINTA-X  
30 OPEN "COM1:9600,N,8,1,CDO,CSO,DSO,RS," FOR RANDOM  
AS #1  
50 key1$ = INKEY$: IF key1$ = "" THEN GO TO 50  
60 REM KEY1S  
70 IF key1$ = CHR$(119) THEN GOSUB 200: REM "w" key  
80 IF key1$ = CHR$(101) THEN GOSUB 200: REM "e" key  
90 IF key1$ = CHR$(110) THEN GOSUB 200: REM "n" key  
100 IF key1$ = CHR$(115) THEN GOSUB 200: REM "s" key  
105 IF key1$ = "x" THEN END: REM To exit test.  
110 GO TO 50  
1. RS-232 Cable  
The input hardware uses  
a
standard 6-line telephone jack  
connector, pre-attached to a 6-conductor flat line telephone style  
cable (of any length, up to 100' and perhaps even more, depending  
on the gauge of the cable). You will also need either a 9-pin or 25-  
pin RS-232 connector, whichever your computer uses for the  
serial port. All of the above items are available at most electronics  
hardware stores.  
120 END  
200 REM directions  
210 REM west  
Fig. 29 shows the LX200 pinouts for the 6-line telephone  
connector. The table below shows standard IBM compatible DB-9  
and DB-25 serial port pin outs,** and how they should be  
connected to the LX200 6-line modular connector.  
220 IFkey1$ = "w"THENa$ = "#:Mw#": PRINT #1, a$: REM GO west  
230 REM east  
240 IFkey1$ = "e" THEN a$ = "#:Me#": PRINT #1, a$: REM GO east  
250 REM north  
260 IF key1$ = "n" THEN a$ = "#:Mn#": PRINT #1, a$: REM GO north  
270 REM south:  
NOTE: Only 3 wires are required.  
280 IFkey1$ = "s"THENa$ = "#:Ms#": PRINT #1,a$: REM GO south  
290key1$ = INKEY$:  
2. LX200 Test Program  
Once you have the RS-232 cable constructed you will want to test  
the cable. Below is a simple program called "LX200 TEST" that is  
written in GW Basic programming language and will work with  
virtually any IBM compatible computer. LX200 TEST is an  
effective program to fully check the RS-232 line communications  
from your personal computer to the LX200, allowing you to  
concentrate on de-bugging your RS-232 cable.  
300 IF key1$ = CHR$(32) THEN GO TO 400 ELSE GO TO 200  
400 REM This stops motion (by hitting SPACE bar).  
410 B$ = "#:Qe#": PRINT #1, BS  
420 B$ = "#:Qw#": PRINT #1, B$  
430 B$ = "#:Qn#": PRINT #1, BS  
440 B$ = "#:Qs#": PRINT #1, B$  
450 RETURN  
To enter the following program, first load BASIC or GWBASIC  
(whichever your computer system uses), then type in the  
following program. When complete, be sure to save the program  
as "LX200TST.BAS."  
460 END  
To use the above program, connect the completed cable to your  
PC serial port and to the LX200 RS-232 Port. Load BASIC (or  
GWBASIC), if not already loaded, and run "LX200TST.BAS."  
Nothing will appear on the computer screen. Press any one of the  
N, S, E, or W (lower case) keys on your  
LX200 RS-232 CONNECTOR  
PIN OUT CODE LEGEND  
DESCRIPTION  
TO DB-9 CONNECTOR PIN#"*  
TO DB-25 CONNECTOR  
PIN#*"  
6 WIRE MODULAR CONNECTOR  
#1  
#2  
#3  
#4  
#5  
#6  
+12 VOLTS DC  
NOT USED  
NOT USED  
#3  
NOT USED  
NOT USED  
#2  
MISC. SERIAL OUT  
PC TRANSMIT DATA  
GROUND  
#5  
#7  
PC RECEIVE DATA  
MISC. SERIAL IN  
#2  
#3  
NOT USED  
NOT USED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
55  
DD*  
Example 56*  
Range 00* - 90*  
PC keyboard, this will move the LX200 North, South, East, or West  
respectively. Press the space bar on the PC keyboard to stop.  
Press X to exit the program.  
"Higher" parameter (degrees).  
TT.T  
If the LX200 does not respond to the N, S, E, or W keys, be sure  
the CAPSLOCK is OFF. If it still does not work, check the PC  
serial port pinouts of your computer to be sure they are wired  
correctly to the LX200 6-line connector.  
Example 59.2  
Range  
56.4 - 60.1  
Tracking "frequency."  
With a successful check-out of the PC link with the LX200 using  
LX200 TEST, you are now ready to write your own software  
program using the LX200 Command Set, or to use the sample  
program called "DEMO" that is written in Quick Basic software  
language.  
<obj> info  
Example CNGC1976 SU DNEBMAG 3.9 SZ 66.0'  
Range n/a  
Object information.  
Ok  
Example  
Range  
1
3. LX200 Command Set  
0 or 1  
Intended for professional programmers, the LX200 Command Set  
Status value returned after setting values. If the  
value is legal 1 is returned, otherwise 0 is returned.  
is used to write custom software for remote operation of the  
telescope with  
appropriate to its type. Each entry in the command list includes the  
command name, any parameters, any return values, and  
description. The parameters and the return data are shown in a  
manner that indicates their format. These formats are listed below  
along with examples of how the data might actually appear, the  
legal range of values, and a short description. Below is a detailed  
description:  
a
PC. Each command is listed in  
a
section  
b. General Telescope Information  
Command :GR#  
a
Returns  
+HH:MM.T#  
Gets the current Flight Ascension.  
Command :GD#  
Returns sDD*MM#  
Gets the current Declination.  
a. Command Set Formats  
HH:MM.T  
Command :GA#  
Returns sDD*MM#  
Gets the current Altitude.  
Example 05:47.4  
Range  
00:00.0 - 23:59.9  
Hours, minutes, and tenths of minutes.  
Command :GZ#  
Returns DDD*MM#  
sDD*MM  
Gets the current Azimuth.  
Example +45*59  
Range  
-90*00 - +90*00  
Command :GS# Returns  
HH:MM:SS#  
Signed degrees and minutes (the '" represents  
ASCII 223 which appears on the handbox as a  
degree symbol).  
Gets the current sidereal time.  
Command  
Returns  
:SS HH:MM:SS#  
Ok  
Sets the sidereal time.  
DDD*MM  
Example 254*09  
Range 000*00 - 359*59  
Unsigned degrees and minutes.  
Command :GL#  
:Ga#  
Returns  
HH:MM:SS  
Example 13:15:36  
HH:MM:SS#  
Gets the local time either in 24 hour (GL) or 12 hour (Ga)  
format.  
Range  
00:00:00-23:59:59  
Hours, minutes, and seconds.  
Command :SL HH:MM:SS#  
MM/DD/YY  
Returns  
Ok  
Example 02/06/92  
Range 01/01/00 - 12/31/99 (see description)  
Month, day, and year. The two digit year  
Sets the local time. NOTE: The parameter should always  
be in 24 hour format.  
indicates the following:  
92-99= 1992-1999  
00-9) =2000-2091  
Command :GC#  
Returns MM/DD/YY#  
Gets the calendar date.  
sHH  
Command :SC MM/DD/YY#  
Example  
Range  
Signed hour offset.  
-5  
Returns  
Ok (see description)  
-24 - +24  
Sets the calendar date. NOTE: After the Ok, if the date is  
valid, two strings will be sent. The first will contain the  
message "Updating planetary data," the second (sent  
after the planetary calculations) will contain only blanks.  
Both strings will be terminated by the "#" symbol.  
NNNN  
Example  
Range  
3456  
0000 - 9999'  
Four digit object number.  
Command :Gt#  
Returns sDD*MM#  
sMM.M  
Gets the latitude of the currently selected site.  
Example 02.4 Range  
05.5 - 20.0  
Command :St sDD*MM#  
Signed magnitude value.  
Returns  
Ok  
Sets the latitude of the currently selected site.  
NNN  
Example  
Range  
134  
000 - 200  
Command :Gg#  
Returns DDD*MM#  
Gets the longitude of the currently selected site.  
Three digit object size (minutes).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command :Sg DDD*MM#  
Returns Ok  
56  
commands except ":Q#" and ":h?#" are disabled during  
the search.  
Sets the longitude of the currently selected site.  
Command :GG#  
Returns sHH#  
Command :hP#  
Returns Nothing  
Gets the offset from Greenwich Mean Time.  
Slews the telescope to the home position.  
Command :SG sHH#  
Command :h?#  
Returns  
Ok  
Returns 0, 1, or 2  
Sets the offset from Greenwich Mean Time.  
Returns the home status: 0 if home search failed or not  
yet attempted, 1 if home position found, or 2 if a home  
search is in progress.  
Command  
:W1#  
:W2#  
:W3#  
e. Library/Objects  
Command :Gr#  
:W4#  
Nothing  
Returns  
Returns  
HH:MM.T#  
Sets the current site number.  
Gefs object right ascension.  
c. Telescope Motion  
Command :Sr HH:MM.T#  
Command  
:Mn#  
:Ms#  
Returns  
Ok  
Sefs object right ascension.  
:Me#  
:Mw#  
Nothing  
Command :Gd#  
Returns sDD*MM#  
Gefs object declination.  
Returns  
Starts motion in the specified direction at the current rate.  
Command :Sd sDD*MM#  
Command :MS#  
Returns 0, 1, 2, or 4 (see description)  
Returns  
Ok  
Sefs object declination.  
Slews telescope to current object coordinates.  
0
is  
returned if the telescope can complete the slew, 1 is  
returned if the object is below the horizon, 2 is returned if  
the object is below the "higher" limit, and 4 is returned if  
the object is above the lower limit. If 1, 2, or 4 is returned, a  
string containing an appropriate message is also returned.  
Command :Sa sDD*MM#  
Returns  
Ok  
Sefs object altitude (for MA command).  
Command :Sz DDD*MM#  
Returns  
Ok  
Command :MA#  
Returns  
Sefs object azimuth (for MA command).  
0
Command :CM#  
Returns (see description)  
Slews telescope to object alt-az coordinates (set with the  
Sa and Sz commands). This command only works in the  
LAND and ALTAZ modes.  
Sync. Matches current telescope coordinates to the  
object coordinates and sends a string indicating which  
object's coordinates were used.  
Command :Qn#  
Command :Gy#  
Returns GPDCO#  
:Qs#  
:Qe#  
Gefs the "type" string for the FIND operation. A capital  
letter means that the corresponding type is selected while a  
lower case letter indicates it is not.  
:Qw#  
Nothing  
Returns  
Stops motion in the specified direction. Also stops the  
telescope if a slew to an object is in progress.  
Command :Sy GPDCO#  
Returns  
Ok  
Command :Q#  
Returns Nothing  
Stops a slew to an object.  
Sefs the "type" string for the FIND operation.  
Command :Gq#  
Returns SU#, EX#, VG#, GD#, FR#, PR#, or VP#  
Gefs fhe current minimum quality for the FIND operation.  
Command  
:RG#  
:RC#  
:RM#  
:RS#  
Nothing  
Command :Sq#  
Returns Nothing  
Returns  
Sfeps to the next minimum quality for the FIND operation.  
Sefs the motion rate to guide (RG), center (PC), find (RM),  
or slew (RS).  
Command  
Returns  
:Gh#  
DD*#  
Command :Sw N#  
Returns Ok  
Gefs the current "higher" limit. \  
Sefs the maximum slew rate to "N" degrees per second  
where N is 2 through 4.  
Command  
Returns  
:Sh DD#  
Ok  
Sefs fhe current "higher" limit.  
d. Home Position  
Command :hS#  
Command :Go#  
Returns DD*#  
Returns  
Nothing  
Sfarts a home position search and saves the telescope  
position. NOTE: All commands except ":Q#" and ":h?#"  
are disabled during the search.  
Gefs the current "lower" limit.  
Command :So DD*#  
Returns  
Ok  
Command :hF#  
Returns Nothing  
Sefs the current "lower" limit.  
Command  
:Gb#  
:Gf#  
Sfarts a home position search and sets the telescope  
position according to the saved values. NOTE: All  
Returns sMM.M#  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
57  
Gefs the brighter (Gb) or fainter (Gf) magnitude limit for  
the FIND operation.  
:B1#  
:B2#  
Command  
:Sb sMM.M#  
:Sf sMM.M#  
:B3#  
Nothing  
Returns  
Returns Ok  
Increases (B+) or decreases (B-) reticle brightness, or  
sets to one of the flashing modes (BO, B1, B2, or B3).  
Sets the brighter (Sb) or fainter (Sf) magnitude limit for the  
FIND operation.  
Command  
:F+#  
:F-#  
Command  
Returns NNN'#  
:GI#  
:Gs#  
:FQ#  
:FF#  
:FS#  
Gefs the larger (Gl) or smaller (Gs) size limit for the FIND  
Returns  
Nothing  
operation.  
Sfarts focus out (F+), starts focus in (F-), stops focus  
change (FQ), sets focus fast (FF), or sets focus slow (FS).  
Command  
:SI NNN#  
:Ss NNN#  
Command  
:GM#  
:GN#  
:GO#  
:GP#  
XYZ#  
Returns Ok  
Sets the larger (SI) or smaller (Ss) size limit for the FIND  
operation.  
Command :GF#  
Returns NNN'#  
Gets the field radius of the FIELD operation.  
Returns  
Gefs SITE name (XYZ). M through N correspond to 1  
through 4.  
Command  
Returns  
:SF NNN#  
Ok  
Command  
:SM XYZ#  
:SN XYZ#  
:SOXYZ#  
:SP XYZ#  
Sets the field radius of the FIELD operation.  
Command  
Returns  
:LF#  
Nothing  
Returns  
Ok  
Sefs SITE name.  
Starts a FIND operation.  
Command :GT#  
Command :LN#  
Returns Nothing  
Returns  
TT.T#  
Gefs the current track "frequency."  
Finds the next object in a FIND sequence.  
Command :ST TT.T#  
Command :LB#  
Returns Nothing  
Finds the previous object in a FIND sequence.  
Returns  
Ok  
Sefs the current track "frequency."  
Command  
:TM#  
:TQ#  
:T+#  
:T-#  
Nothing  
Command :Lf#  
Returns (see description)  
Performs a FIELD operation returning a string containing  
the number of objects in the field and the object that is  
closest to the center of the field.  
Returns  
Switch to manual (TM) or quartz (TM). Increment (T+) or  
decrement (T-) manual frequency by one tenth.  
Command  
:LC NNNN#  
:LM NNNN#  
Command :D#  
Returns (see description)  
Gefs the distance "bars'"string.  
:LS NNNN#  
Nothing  
Returns  
Sets the object to the NGC (LC), Messier (LM), or Star  
(LS) specified by the number. Planets are "stars" 901-  
909. The object type returned for LC and LS commands  
depends on which object type has been selected with the  
Lo and Ls commands (see below).  
Command  
:AL#  
:AP# :AA# Returns  
Nothing  
Sefs the telescopes alignment type to LAND, POLAR, or  
ALTAZ.  
Command :LI#  
Returns <obj> info#  
Command  
Returns  
:r+# :r-#  
Nothing  
Gefs the current object information.  
Turns the field de-rotator on (:r+#) and off (:r-#).  
Command  
Returns  
:Lo N#  
Ok  
Command  
Returns  
:f+# :f-#  
Nothing  
Sefs the NGC object library type. 0 is the NGC library, 1 is  
the 1C library, and 2 is the UGC library. This operation is  
successful only if the user has a version of the software that  
includes the desired library.  
Turns fhe fan on (:f+#) and off (:f-#).  
Command :Ls N#  
Returns Ok  
Sefs the STAR object library type. 0 is the STAR library, 1  
is the SAO library, and 2 is the GCVS library. This  
operation is successful only if the user has a version of  
the software that includes the desired library.  
f. Miscellaneous  
Command  
:B+#  
:B-#  
:BO#  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 8  
Please note that Meade Instruments does not support these  
programs, or programs that you may write in any way. For  
questions relating to after-market software programs, refer back  
to those manufacturers.  
4. LX200 Demo Program  
The RS-232 interface communicates with your computer at 9600  
Baud Rate, Parity = None, 8 Data Bits, 1 Stop Bits. For those who  
are familiar with programming, the LX200 Command Set is written in  
ASKII character format and can be used to write your own programs.  
Meade does recommend and support our Epoch 2000sk software  
package which is fully compatible with the LX200 telescope (Fig.  
30). This program presents on the display of a personal computer  
an incredibly detailed simulation of the entire sky, including up to  
281,000 celestial objects  
The LX200 Demo Program on the following pages, is written in Quick  
Basic and is intended to demonstrate how commands are sent to the  
telescope and information is received from the telescope. It is not a  
"polished" program and does not incorporate all of the RS-232  
features available.  
Epoch 2000 allows the presentation of the most complex starfields  
just as they actually appear through the telescope. This software  
is available for Windows 3.1 or higher, including Windows 95.  
The program is set-up to operate on serial port 2 (COM2:). To  
operate on serial port 1 (COM1:) line 4 should be changed from  
"COM2:" to "COM1:." The program is as follows:  
CIS  
DEFINTA-X  
counter = 0  
OPEN  
"COM2:9600,N,8,1,CDO,CSO,DSO,OPO,RS,TB2048,RB2048"  
FOR RANDOM AS #1  
KEY ON  
KEY(1)ON  
KEY 1, "GOTO":  
ONKEY(1) GOSUB key1  
KEY(2)ON  
KEY 2, "SYNC"  
ON KEY(2) GOSUB KEY2  
KEY(3)ON  
KEY 3, "SLEW"  
ON KEY(3) GOSUB key3  
KEY(4)ON  
KEY 4, "FIND-  
ON KEY(4) GOSUB KEY4  
KEY(5)ON  
KEYS, "CNTR"  
ON KEY(5) GOSUB KEYS  
KEY(6)ON  
KEY 6, "GUIDE"  
ON KEY(6) GOSUB KEY6  
KEY(11) ON  
ON KEY(11) GOSUB key1  
KEY(12)ON  
ON KEY(12) GOSUB key12  
KEY(13) ON  
ONKEY(13)GOSUBkey13  
KEY(14) ON  
ON KEY(14) GOSUB key14  
GOSUB status  
GOSUB key3  
GOSUB help 20  
GOSUB telpos  
GOSUB OBDRAWGOSUB TIME 50 key$ =  
INKEY$: IF key$ = "" THEN GO TO 20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
59  
REM KEYS  
IFkey$ = CHR$(119)THEN GOSUB senddir: REM a$ = "#:Mw#"  
IFkeyS = CHR$(101)THEN GOSUB senddir: REM a$ = "#:Me#"  
IF key$ = CHR$(110) THEN GOSUB senddir: REM a$ = "#:Mn#"  
IF key$ = CHR$(115) THEN GOSUB senddir: REM a$ = "#:Ms#"  
IF key$ = "m" THEN GOSUB objects  
IF key$ = "t" THEN GOSUB objects  
IF key$ = "c" THEN GOSUB objects  
IF key$ = "p" THEN GOSUB objects  
IF key$ = "x" THEN CLS : END  
IF key$ = "r" THEN RUN  
GO TO 20  
END  
senddir:  
west:  
IF key$ = "w" THEN a$ = "#:Mw#": PRINT #1, a$: REM GO TO west east:  
IF key$ = "e" THEN a$ = "#:Me#": PRINT #1, a$: REM GO TO east north:  
IF key$ = "n" THEN a$ = "#:Mn#": PRINT #1, a$: REM GO TO north south:  
IF key$ = "s" THEN a$ = "tt:Ms#": PRINT #1, a$: REM GO TO south  
GOSUB telpos key$ = INKEYS:  
IF key$ = CHR$(32) THEN GO TO endl ELSE GO TO senddir endl:  
B$ = "#:Qe#": PRINT #1, B$  
B$ = "#:Qw#": PRINT #1, B$  
B$ = "#:Qn#": PRINT #1, B$  
B$ = "#:Qs#": PRINT #1, B$  
RETURN  
telpos:  
LOCATE 6, 7: PRINT "TELESCOPE POSITION";  
c$ = "#:GR#": PRINT #1, c$; : d$ = INPUT$(8, 1): RAL$ = LEFT$(d$, 3):  
RAMS = MID$(d$, 4, 4): LOCATE 7, 10: PRINT USING "RA : \\:\ \"; RAL$; RAM$; c$ =  
"#:GD#": PRINT #1, c$; : d$ = INPUT$(7, 1): RAL$ = LEFT$(d$, 3):  
RAMS = MID$(d$, 5, 2): LOCATE 8, 10: PRINT "DEC: "; RAL$; CHR$(248); RAMS; "'"; c$  
= "#:GA#": PRINT #1, c$; : d$ = INPUT$(7, 1): RALS = LEFT$(d$, 3):  
RAMS = MID$(d$, 5, 2): LOCATE 9, 10: PRINT "ALT: "; RALS; CHR$(248); RAMS; ""'; c$ =  
"#:GZ#": PRINT #1, c$; : d$ = INPUT$(7, 1): RALS = LEFT$(d$, 3):  
RAM$ = MID$(d$, 5, 2): LOCATE 10, 10: PRINT "AZ :"; RAL$; CHR$(248); RAMS; '"";  
RETURN  
TIME:  
LOCATE 1, 32: PRINT "DATE"; : LOCATE 1, 64: PRINT "TIME";  
c$ = "#:GS#": PRINT #1, c$; : d$ = INPUT$(9, 1): RAL$ = LEFT$(d$, 2):  
RAMS = MID$(d$, 4, 2): RARS = MID$(d$, 7, 2): LOCATE 2, 55:  
PRINT USING "Sidereal Time: \\:\\:\\"; RALS; RAM$; RAR$; C$ = "#:GL#":  
PRINT #1, c$; : d$ = INPUT$(9, 1): RALS = LEFT$(d$, 2):  
RAMS = MID$(d$, 4, 2): RAR$ = MID$(d$, 7, 2): LOCATE 3, 55:  
PRINT USING "Local (24hr) : \Y\Y\\"; RALS; RAM$; RARS;  
C$ = "#:GG#": PRINT #1, c$; : d$ = INPUT$(4, 1): RAL$ = LEFT$(d$, 3):  
LOCATE 3, 25: PRINT USING "GMT Offset: \ \ Hours"; RAL$; c$ =  
"#:GC#": PRINT #1, c$; : d$ = INPUT$(9, 1): RAL$ = LEFT$(d$, 2):  
RAMS = MID$(d$, 4, 2): RAR$ = MID$(d$, 7, 2): LOCATE 2, 25:  
PRINT USING "Date  
RETURN  
: \\A\A\"; RALS; RAM$; RARS;  
objects:  
counter =1  
LOCATE 21,25  
IF key$ = "m" THEN INPUT "Enter Messier number:"; m$: o$ = "#:LM" + m$  
IF key$ = "t" THEN INPUT "Enter Star number: "; m$: o$ = "#:LS" + m$  
IF key$ = "c" THEN INPUT "Enter CNGC number:"; m$: o$ = "#:LC" + m$  
IF key$ = "p" THEN INPUT "Enter Planet number: "; m$: o$ = "#:LS" + m$  
o$ = o$ + "#"  
PRINT #1, o$  
LOCATE 21, 15:  
PRINT"  
";  
PRINT #1, "#:LI#": infoS = INPUT$(33, 1): REM LOCATE 10, 20: PRINT info$;  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 0  
OBDRAW:  
LOCATE 6, 31: PRINT" O B J E C T I N F O R M A T I O N " ;  
LOCATE 7, 31: PRINT "Object: "; LEFT$(info$, 9);  
LOCATE 8, 31: PRINT "Rating: "; MID$(info$, 10, 7);  
LOCATE 9, 31: PRINT "Magnitude: "; MID$(info$, 20, 5);  
LOCATE 10, 31: PRINT "Size:  
"; MID$(info$, 27, 6);  
IF counter = 0 THEN LOCATE 11, 31: PRINT "RA:"; : LOCATE 12, 31:  
PRINT "DEC:"; : LOCATE 7, 60: PRINT "Distance to SLEW"; : LOCATE 9,  
55: PRINT "RA"; : LOCATE 10, 55: PRINT "Dec"; : GO TO scale c$ = "#:Gr#":  
PRINT#1,c$; :d$ = INPUT$(8, 1): RAL$ = LEFT$(d$, 2):  
RAMS = MID$(d$, 4, 4): LOCATE 11, 31:  
PRINT USING "RA :  
\\:\ \"; RAL$; RAMS;  
c$ = "#:Gd#": PRINT #1, c$; : d$ = INPUT$(7, 1): RAL$ = LEFT$(d$, 3):  
RAMS = MID$(d$, 5,2): LOCATE 12,31:  
PRINT "DEC:  
"; RAL$; CHR$(248); RAMS;  
distbar:  
rad$ = "": decd$ = ""  
c$ = "#:D#": PRINT #1,c$:d$ = INPUT$(33, 1)  
FORi = 1TO16  
IFASC(MIDS(d$, i, 1)) = 255 THEN rad$ = rad$ + CHR$(254)  
NEXT i  
FOR i = 17 TO 33  
IFASC(MID$(d$, i, 1)) = 255THEN decd$ = decd$ + CHR$(254)  
NEXTi  
LOCATE 7, 59: PRINT " Distance to SLEW "; scale:  
LOCATE 8, 59: PRINT "0"; CHRS(248); " 45"; CHR$(248); " 90"; CHR$(248); " 150+";  
CHR$(248); IF  
counter = 0 THEN RETURN  
LOCATE 9, 55: PRINT "  
";: LOCATE 9, 55:  
";: LOCATE 10, 55:  
PRINT "RA ";rad$;  
LOCATE 10, 55: PRINT"  
PRINT "DEC "; decd$;  
RETURN  
status:  
LOCATE 1, 7: PRINT "SITE"  
c$ = "#:Gt#": PRINT #1,c$; : d$ = INPUT$(7, 1): RAL$ = LEFT$(d$, 3):  
RAMS = MID$(dS, 5, 2): LOCATE 2, 3: PRINT Tat. : "; RAL$; CHRS (248); RAMS; "'"; c$ =  
"#:Gg#": PRINT #1, c$; : d$ = INPUT$(7, 1): RAL$ = LEFT$(d$, 3):  
RAMS = MID$(d$, 5, 2): LOCATE 3, 3: PRINT "Long.: "; RALS; CHRS (248); RAMS; ""';  
BOXSTX = 2: BOXSTY = 3: BOXWIDE = 10: boxtall = 5: GOSUB drawbox  
RETURN  
keyi:  
PRINT #1, "#:MS#"  
error1$ = INPUT$(1, 1)  
IF errorl $ = "1" OR errorl $ = "2" THEN error2$ = INPUT$(33, 1) ELSE RETURN  
LOCATE 22, 20: PRINT error2$  
GOSUB clearscr  
RETURN  
KEY2:  
PRINT #1, "#:CM#"  
sync$ = INPUT$(33, 1)  
LOCATE 22, 20: PRINT sync$;  
clearscr:  
FOR i = 1 TO 30000: NEXT i: FOR i = 1 TO 30000: NEXT i: FOR i = 1 TO 30000: NEXT i:  
FOR i = 1 TO 30000: NEXT i: FOR i = 1 TO 30000: NEXT i: FOR i = 1 TO 30000: NEXT i:  
LOCATE 22, 20: PRINT "  
";  
RETURN  
key3:  
PRINT #1, "#:RS#"  
LOCATE 24, 1: PRINT  
LOCATE 24, 18: PRINT CHR$(219); CHR$(178); CHR$(176); CHR$(176); CHR$(178); CHR$(219);  
RETURN  
KEY4:  
PRINT #1,"#:RM#:"  
LOCATE 24, 1: PRINT"  
";  
LOCATE 24, 26: PRINT CHR$(219); CHR$(178); CHR$(176); CHR$(176); CHR$(178); CHR$(219);  
RETURN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
61  
KEYS:  
PRINT #1,"#:RC#"  
LOCATE 24, 1: PRINT"  
LOCATE 24, 34: PRINT CHR$(219); CHR$(178); CHR$(176); CHR$(176); CHR$(178); CHR$(219);  
RETURN  
KEY6:  
PRINT #1, "#:RG#"  
LOCATE 24, 1: PRINT"  
LOCATE 24, 42: PRINT CHR$(219); CHR$(178); CHR$(176); CHR$(176); CHR$(178); CHR$(219);  
RETURN  
key11:  
key$ ="n"  
GOSUB north  
RETURN  
key12:  
key$ = "w"  
GOSUB west  
RETURN  
key 13:  
key$ = "e" GOSUB east  
RETURN key14:  
key$ = "s"  
GOSUB south  
RETURN  
drawbox:  
REM  
LOCATE BOXSTX, BOXSTY:  
REM  
BOX$ = CHR$(201)  
REM  
REM  
FOR I = 1 TO BOXWIDE: BOX$ = BOX$ + CHR$(205): NEXT  
PRINT BOX$;  
RETURN  
help:  
LOCATE 14, 10: PRINT "E W N S keys move telescope. SPACE BAR stops.";  
LOCATE 15, 10: PRINT "M key to enter Messier object.";  
LOCATE 16, 10: PRINT "T key to enter sTar."  
LOCATE 17, 10: PRINT "P key to enter Planet (900 + orbit #).";  
LOCATE 18, 10: PRINT "C key to enter Cngc object.";  
LOCATE 19, 10: PRINT "X to End program.";  
RETURN  
END  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 2  
APPENDIX G: LX200  
SPECIFICATIONS  
8" LX200 f/6.3  
10" LX200 f/6.3  
7" LX200 f/15  
Telescope  
Maksutov-Cassegrain Catadioptric Schmidt-Cassegrain Catadioptric  
Schmidt-Cassegrain Catadioptric  
Optical Design  
Clear Aperture  
178mm (7")  
194mm (7.625")  
2670mm (105")  
f/15  
203mm (8")  
209.6mm (8.25)  
1280mm (50.4")  
f/6.3  
254mm (10")  
Primary Mirror Diameter  
Focal Length  
263.5mm (10.375)  
1600mm (63")  
Focal Ratio  
f/6.3  
Resolution  
.64 arc sec.  
standard  
13.5  
.56 arc sec  
Standard  
.45 arc sec  
Super Multi-Coatings  
Limiting Visual Magnitude (approx)  
Limiting Photographic Magnitude (approx)  
Image Scale ("/inch)  
Maximum Practical Visual Power  
Near Focus  
Standard  
14.0  
14.5  
16.0  
16.5  
17.0  
.55°/inch  
450X  
1.14°/inch  
500X  
0.91 "/inch  
625X  
50'  
25'  
50'  
9.1" Dia. x 19" Long  
2.5" (12.8%)  
9.1" Dia. x 16" Long  
3.45" (18.6%)  
Optical Tube Size  
11.75" Dia. x 22" Long  
4.0" (16.0%)  
Secondary Mirror Obstruction  
Telescope Mounting  
Heavy-Duty Fork-Type Double Tine  
Heavy-Duty Fork-Type Double Tine  
Heavy-Duty Fork-Type Double Tine  
Setting Circle Diameters  
RA Motor Drive System  
Dec.: 6"; R.A.: 8.75"  
Dec.: 6"; R.A.: 8.75"  
Dec.: 6"; R.A.: 8.75"  
9-speed, microprocessor  
controlled 12v. DC servo motor;  
5.75" worm gear with Smart Drive  
9-speed, microprocessor controlled  
12v. DC servo motor; 5.75" worm  
gear with Smart Drive  
9-speed, microprocessor controlled  
12v. DC servo motor; 5.75" worm  
gear with Smart Drive  
Hemispheres of Operation  
Declination Control System  
North and South -switchable  
North and South -switchable  
North and South -switchable  
9-speed, DC servo controlled  
5.75" worm gear with Dec drift  
software  
9-speed, DC servo controlled 5.75"  
worm gear with Dec drift software  
9-speed, DC servo controlled 5.75"  
worm gear with Dec drift software  
Motor Drive Gear Diameter  
Manual Slow-Motion Controls  
Hand Controller  
5-3/4" Worm Gear  
Dec. and R.A.  
5-3/4" Worm Gear  
Dec. and R.A.  
5-3/4" Worm Gear  
Dec. and R.A.  
Motorola 68HC05 microcontroller; Motorola 68HC05 microcontroller; 2  
2 line x 16 alphanumeric character line x 16 alphanumeric character  
display; 19 button keypad, red LED display; 19 button keypad, red LED  
Motorola 68HC05 microcontroller; 2  
line x 16 alphanumeric character  
display; 19 button keypad, red LED  
backlit  
backlit  
backlit  
Main Controller  
16 MHz 68000 microprocessor; 1  
Meg program memory 16KRAM;  
512 byte non-volatile memory  
(EEROM)  
16 MHz 68000 microprocessor; 1 Meg 16 MHz 68000 microprocessor; 1 Meg  
program memory 16K RAM; 51 2 byte program memory 16K RAM; 512 byte  
non-volatile memory (EEROM)  
non-volatile memory (EEROM)  
9.25" x 16" x 32.5"  
0.74° x 0.52°  
Telescope Size, Swung Down  
35mm Angular Film Coverage  
35mm Linear Film Coverage @:  
50"  
9.25" x 16"x25"  
1.55°x 1.08°  
12" x 19"x31"  
1. 24° x 0.86°  
4.7" X 6.6"  
4.6' X 6.5'  
9.7" x 13.6"  
9.4' x 13.3'  
56.3' X 79.7'  
7.75" x 10.9"  
7.5' X 10.7'  
500"  
27.4' x 38.9'  
3000"  
45.0' x 63.8'  
Tele-Extender Used Without Eyepiece @:  
50'  
4.4" x 6.5"  
4.2' x 5.5'  
24' x 34'  
9.1" x 13.3"  
7.7' x 14.1'  
48' x 70'  
7.3" X 10.6"  
6.1' X 9.0'  
39' x 56'  
500'  
3000'  
Net Telescope Weights (approx)  
Telescope  
45#  
7#  
37#  
7#  
61#  
N/A  
26#  
20#  
Optional Equatorial Wedge  
Optional Super Wedge  
Field Tripod  
N/A  
20#  
8#  
N/A  
20#  
8#  
Accessories  
a#  
Shipping Weights (approx)  
Telescope  
65#  
9#  
69#  
N/A  
38#  
26#  
N/A  
5#  
64# (w/ case)  
Equatorial Wedge (optional)  
Super Wedge (optional)  
Field Tripod  
9#  
N/A  
26#  
N/A  
26#  
N/A  
5#  
Case (for 10" models)  
Accessories  
5#  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 3  
200 f/10  
8" LX200I/10  
an-Schmidt-Cassegrain  
Catadioptric  
10" LX200f/10  
Telescope  
Schmidt-Cassegrain Catadioptric  
Schmidt-Cassegrain Catadioptric  
Ophcai Design  
Clear Aperture  
203mm (8")  
209.6mm (8.25)  
2000mm (80")  
f/10  
254mm (10")  
263.5mm (10.375)  
2500mm (100")  
f/10  
305mm (12")  
Primary Mirror Diameter  
Focal Length  
314.3mm (12.375")  
3048mm (120")  
Focal Ratio  
f/10  
Resolution  
.56 arc sec  
Standard  
14.0  
.45 arc sec  
Standard  
.375 arc sec  
Super Multi-Coatings  
Limiting Visual Magnitude (approx)  
Limiting Photographic Magnitude (approx)  
Image Scale (°/inch)  
Maximum Practical Visual Power  
Near Focus  
Standard  
14.5  
15.0  
16.5  
17.0  
17.5  
0.72°/inch  
500X  
0.57°/inch  
625X  
0.48°/inch  
750X  
50'  
25'  
75'  
11.75" Dia. x 22" Long  
3.7" (13.7%)  
Optical Tube Size  
9.1" Dia. x 16" Long  
3.0" (14.1%)  
13.6" Dia. X25" Long  
4.0" (11.1%)  
Secondary Mirror Obstruction  
Telescope Mounting  
Heavy-Duty Fork-Type Double  
Tine  
Heavy-Duty Fork-Type Double Tine  
Heavy-Duty Fork-Type Double Tine  
Setting Circle Diameters  
RA Motor Drive System  
Dec.: 6"; R.A.: 8.75"  
Dec.: 6"; R.A.: 8.75"  
Dec.: 6"; R.A.: 8.75"  
9-speed, microprocessor  
controlled 12v. DC servo motor;  
5.75" worm gear with Smart Drive gear with Smart Drive  
9-speed, microprocessor controlled  
12v. DC servo motor; 5.75" worm  
9-Speed, microprocessor controlled  
12v. DC servo motor; 5.75" worm  
gear with Smart Drive  
Hemispheres of Operation  
Declination Control System  
North and South -switchable  
North and South -switchable  
North and South -switchable  
9-speed, DC servo controlled  
5.75" worm gear with Dec drift  
software  
9-speed, DC servo controlled 5.75"  
worm gear with Dec drift software  
9-speed, DC servo controlled 5.75"  
worm gear with Dec drift software  
Motor Drive Gear Diameter  
Manual Slow-Motion Controls  
Hand Controller  
5-3/4" Worm Gear  
Dec. and R.A.  
5-3/4" Worm Gear  
Dec. and R.A.  
5-3/4" Worm Gear  
Dec. and R.A.  
Motorola 68HC05 microcontroller; Motorola 68HC05 microcontroller; 2  
2 line x 16 alphanumeric character line x 16 alphanumeric character  
display; 19 button keypad, red LED display; 19 button keypad, red LED  
Motorola 68HC05 microcontroller; 2  
line x 16 alphanumeric character  
display; 19 button keypad, red LED  
backlit  
backlit  
backlit  
16 MHz 68000 microprocessor; 1 16 MHz 68000 microprocessor; 1 Meg 16 MHz 68000 microprocessor; 1 Meg  
Main Controller  
Meg program memory 16KRAM;  
512 byte non-volatile memory  
(EEROM)  
program memory 16K RAM; 512 byte program memory 16K RAM; 51 2 byte  
non-volatile memory (EEROM)  
non-volatile memory (EEROM)  
Telescope Size, Swung Down  
35mm Angular Film Coverage  
35mm Linear Film Coverage @:  
50"  
9.25" x 16"x25"  
0.97° x 0.68°  
12" x 19" x 31"  
0.78° x 0.54°  
15"x20"x37"  
0.65° x 0.45°  
6.2" x 8.7"  
6.01 x 8.5'  
5.0" x 7.0"  
4.8' x 6.8'  
4.1" x 5.8"  
4.0' x 5.7'  
500"  
36.0' X 51.0'  
3000"  
28.8' x 40.8'  
24.0' x 34.0'  
Tele-Extender Used Without Eyepiece @:  
50'  
6.8" X 8.5"  
4.9' x 7.2'  
31'x45'  
4.6" x 6.8"  
4.0' x 5.8'  
25' X 36'  
3.5" x 5.7"  
3.3' x 4.8'  
21'x30'  
500'  
3000'  
Net Telescope Weights (approx)  
Telescope  
37#  
7#  
61#  
N/A  
26#  
20#  
8#  
70#  
N/A  
26#  
50#  
8#  
Optional Equatorial Wedge  
Optional Super Wedge  
Field Tripod  
N/A  
20#  
8#  
Accessories  
Shipping Weights (approx)  
Telescope  
64# (w/ case)  
69#  
N/A  
38#  
26#  
30#  
5#  
95# (w/ case)  
N/A  
9#  
Equatorial Wedge (optional)  
Super Wedge (optional)  
Field Tripod  
N/A  
26#  
30#  
5#  
38#  
57#  
Case (for 1 0" models)  
N/A  
10#  
Accessories  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Instructions  
Meade Standard Field Tripod  
For use with the 7" LX200 Maksutov-Cassegrain, 8" LX200 and 10"  
LX200 Schmidt-Cassegrain, and 4" and 5" ED APO Telescopes  
The Standard Field Tripod is supplied as a completely assembled unit,  
up. Place 1 "C" clip retainer into the slot in the threaded rod. This clip  
except for the spreader bar (4, Fig. 1) and the 2 lock knobs (6, Fig. 1)  
for each of the 3 tripod legs, used to adjust tripod height. These  
knobs are packed separately for safety in shipment.  
holds the threaded rod in place. (See Fig. 2.)  
Position the spreader bar so that the 3 arms of the spreader bar are  
lined up with the 3 tripod legs. Place the entire telescope onto the top  
of the tripod head, and thread the threaded rod into the central  
threaded hole in the bottom of the drive base of the telescope. Tighten  
the tension knob (3, Fig. 1); firm tightening of the tension knob is  
sufficient to result in rigid positioning of the tripod legs. It is not  
necessary to use extreme force in tightening this knob.  
For visual (i.e., non-photographic) observations, the drive base of the  
telescope's fork mount is attached directly to the field tripod. The  
telescope in this way is mounted in an "Altazimuth" (Altitude-  
Azimuth," or "Vertical-Horizontal") format.  
After removing the field tripod from its shipping carton, stand the  
tripod vertically, with the tripod feet down and with the tripod fully  
collapsed (Fig. 2). Remove the carton strap holding one leg and  
extension strut together. Grasp two of the tripod legs and, with the full  
weight of the tripod on the third leg, gently pull the legs apart to a fully  
open position.  
To vary the tripod height loosen the 6 lock-knobs, slide the 3 inner  
tripod leg sections out to the desired height, and firmly re-tighten (but  
do not over-tighten) the 6 lock knobs.  
To collapse the tripod after removing the telescope and equatorial  
wedge, if applicable, rotate the spreader bar 60° from its assembled  
position so that one spreader bar arm is located between each  
adjacent pair of tripod legs. At the base of the tripod is a 3-vane  
extension strut system (7, Fig. 1) with a circular hub at its center (8,  
Fig. 1). Grasp the tripod head (1, Fip,. 1) with one hand and, with the  
other hand, pull directly "up" on the central hub of the extension strut  
system. This operation will cause the tripod legs to move inward to a  
collapsed position.  
Thread in the 6 lock knobs (2 on each tripod) near the foot of each  
tripod leg. These lock knobs are used to fix the height of the inner,  
extendible tripod leg sections.  
CAUTION: "Firm feel" tightening is sufficient; over-  
tightening may strip the threads of the lock knobs or  
damage the tripod, and results in no additional strength.  
The spreader bar (5, Fig. 1) has been removed for shipment. To  
install, first remove the threaded rod (2, Fig. 1) from the bottom of the  
tripod head (1, Fig. 1). A small piece of plastic holds the threaded rod  
in place. Enclosed in the plastic bag attached to this instruction sheet  
is a "C" clip retainer and an extra clip, and 1 flat washer. These items  
will be used below.  
CAUTION: If the tripod does not seem to extend or  
collapse easily, do not force the tripod legs in or out. By  
following the instructions above, the tripod will function  
properly, but if you are unclear on the proper procedure, -  
forcingIheWpod into an Incorrect position may damage  
the extension strut system.  
Slide the flat washer (4, Fig. 1) onto the threaded rod so that it rests  
against the tension knob (3, Fig. 1). Slide the spreader bar onto the  
threaded rod (note the correct orientation as shown in Fig. 1) and from  
underneath pass the threaded rod through the tripod head (1, Fig. 1).  
Be sure that the spreader bar is not upside-down on the threaded  
rod; the flat side of the spreader bar should face  
If you have any questions regarding the use of the Field Tripod,  
please call Meade Customer Service at (949) 451-1450. Customer  
Service hours are from 8:30am to 4:30pm Pacific Time, Monday  
through Friday.  
- "C" Clip  
(1) Tripod Head  
(2) Threaded Rod  
(3) Tension Knob  
(4) Spreader Bar  
(5) Lock Knobs  
(6) Extension Strut  
(7) Tension Hub  
Fig. 1: Field Tripod  
Fig. 2: Field Tripod (collapsed)  
A D V A N C E D P R O D U C T S D I V I S I O N  
Meade Instruments Corporation  
World's Leading Manufacturer of Astronomical Telescopes for the Serious Amateur  
6001 Oak Canyon, Irvine, California 92618 • (949)451-1450  
FAX: (949) 451-1460 • www.meade.com  
©2000  
Version 0700  
Part Number 14-0220-00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Instructions  
Meade® 18-volt DC Power Supply  
For Use with Meade LX200 Model Telescopes  
DC OPERATION  
INTRODUCTION  
Meade LX200 model telescopes are now supplied  
with 18-volt DC systems. This higher voltage allows  
for smoother slewing at high speeds and more  
reliable telescope operation.  
(Using the optional #1812 Electronic DC Adapter)  
For DC operation from a car battery, perform the  
following steps:  
NOTE: The 25-ft. (8-m) DC power cord cannot be  
connected directly to the cigarette lighter plug—  
you must use the #1812 Electronic DC Adapter.  
You can operate Meade LX200 telescopes from any  
120vAC indoor power outlet using the 18-volt AC  
Adapter, or from a 12vDC source (a car battery)  
using the optional #1812 Electronic DC Adapter (see  
the figure below.)  
1. Connect the optional #1812 DC Adapter to the  
car cigarette lighter plug.  
AC OPERATION  
2. Connect the 25-ft. (8-m) DC power cord to the  
#1812 DC Adapter.  
To power the telescope using AC house current,  
follow these steps:  
LPlug the AC Adapter into an indoor wall  
3. Plug the 25-ft. (8 m) DC power cord into the  
18vDC connector on the power panel of the  
LX200.  
receptacle.  
CAUTION: The AC adapter supplied with this  
telescope is for indoor use only. Do not plug  
this adapter into an outdoor AC receptacle or  
serious electrical shock may result.  
4. Operate the telescope as described in the LX200  
Instruction Manual.  
2. Connect the 25-ft. (8-m) DC power cord to the AC  
adapter.  
CUSTOMER SERVICE  
If you have any questions regarding the use of the  
18-volt DC power supply, please call Meade  
Customer Service at (949) 451-1450. Customer  
Service hours are from 8:30 AM to 4:30 PM Pacific  
Time, Monday through Friday.  
3. Plug the 25-ft. (8-m) DC power cord into the  
18vDC connector on the power panel of the  
LX200.  
4. Operate the telescope as described in the LX200  
Instruction Manual.  
To indoor wall  
AC Adapter  
receptacle  
NOTE: DC Power Cord with  
inline fuse must be used or  
warranty will be void.  
25 ft. (8 m.) DC Power Cord  
To car cigarette  
#1812 Electronic DC Adapter  
lighter plug  
(Optional)  
A D V A N C E D P R O D U C T S D I V I S I O N  
Meade Instruments Corporation  
World's Leading Manufacturer of Astronomical Telescopes for the Serious Amateur  
6001 Oak Canyon, Irvine, California 92618 • (949)451-1450  
FAX: (949) 451-1460 • www.meade.com  
(c) 2000  
Version 0700  
Part No. 14-110-01  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Krell Industries TV Converter Box STUDIO 2 User Manual
La Crosse Technology Weather Radio S84193 User Manual
Lance Larkin Coffeemaker Brew Express CoffeeMaker User Manual
Land Pride Lawn Mower DRG04 User Manual
Land Pride Lawn Mower ZSR54 ZSR60 User Manual
LG Electronics Computer Monitor 57M User Manual
LG Electronics Mouse LSM 100 User Manual
Marantz DVD Player DV4300 User Manual
Maytag Range 8113P644 60 User Manual
Midland Radio Two Way Radio GXT760 User Manual